JP2021120027A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To recognize an operation mode of derivation operation means even if reception of operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated.SOLUTION: In a state in which at least a reel is controlled to constant speed rotation, and reception of stop operation is validated, when it is determined that a rotation state is abnormal in a reel under rotation, the reception of the stop operation is invalidated for all of the reels, and restart control is performed so as to restart rotation for a reel determined to be abnormal. After that, when all of the reels under rotation are normally rotated, the reception of the stop operation is revalidated. Control is performed so as to continuously display a navigation number as navigation notification on a game auxiliary indicator 12 even if the reception of the stop operation is invalidated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention is provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, and after variable display of the variable display unit, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to derive a display result. However, the present invention relates to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units.

Slot machines are generally equipped with a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information on the outer periphery, and each reel is equipped with a start switch by a player. The rotation is started by operating the reel, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel to stop the rotation within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. .. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped.

There are various types of winning roles, such as small roles, special roles, and replay roles. Here, in the winning of the small winning combination, the player can obtain the profit that a fixed number of medals are paid out for each type of the small winning combination. By winning a special role, the player can obtain the benefit of shifting from the next game to a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. Winning a replay role can benefit from the ability to play the next game without consuming new medals to set the number of bets.

As such a slot machine, there is known a slot machine that displays an operation mode of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player from the start to the end of the game by using a display that displays the number of medals to be paid out (for example, a patent). Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5857328

By the way, in the slot machine shown in Patent Document 1, when the invalidation condition for invalidating the acceptance of the stop switch operation is satisfied and the acceptance of the stop switch operation is invalidated, the display of the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed. If it is interrupted, the player may mistakenly recognize the operation mode, which is not convenient.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and provides a slot machine capable of recognizing an operation mode of a derivation operation means even when acceptance of an operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated. With the goal.

(A) A plurality of variable display units capable of variable display by rotating a reel on which a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by a stepping motor driven by changing the excitation state are arranged are provided.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, and a prize can be generated according to a combination of the display results of a plurality of the variable display units. ,
A derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An information display means for displaying operation mode information capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation means, and
A derivation operation receiving means that can accept the operation of the derivation operation means and accepts the operation of the derivation operation means when the activation condition is satisfied after the rotation of the reel starts.
After the reel starts to rotate, regardless of whether the activation condition is satisfied or not, when normal rotation is not detected, a rotation abnormality determining means for determining a rotation abnormality, and a rotation abnormality determining means.
A restart control means that performs restart control that changes the excitation state according to the pattern at the start of rotation of the reel when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal.
When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the activation condition is satisfied, the restart means for restarting the control for changing the excitation state from the excitation state when the power supply is stopped, and
With
The derivation operation receiving means
Operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is not normally performed during the variable display of the specific variable display unit. Is not accepted, and when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is normally performed, the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit is accepted.
The information display means continuously displays the operation mode information until the display end condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the operation of the derivation operation means is accepted.
The restart control means also performs restart control when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal after the control for changing the excitation state is restarted by the restart means.
The derivation operation receiving means
When it is determined that the rotation is abnormal while the activation condition is satisfied, the operation of the derivation operation means is performed during the period from the time when the rotation abnormality is determined to the time when the activation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed. Not accepted,
When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the activation condition is satisfied, if the activation condition is satisfied without being judged as a rotation abnormality, it is valid after the power supply is restarted. If the operation of the derivation operation means is not accepted during the period until the conversion condition is satisfied, and if the activation condition is not satisfied and a rotation abnormality is determined and restart control is performed, the power supply is restarted. The operation of the derivation operation means is not accepted during the period from the restart control to the establishment of the activation condition.
Other slot machines
A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, are provided, and after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is displayed. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping and a prize can be generated according to a combination of display results of a plurality of the variable display units.
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An information display means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) that displays operation mode information capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation means, and
Operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is not normally performed during the variable display of the specific variable display unit. Is invalidated, and when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is normally performed, the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit is enabled. (For example, main control unit 41)
The information display means continuously displays the operation mode information until the display end condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 31). )
According to this configuration, the operation mode of the derivation operation means can be recognized even when the acceptance of the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated.

A start operation receiving means (for example, the main control unit 41) for receiving an operation for starting the variable display of the variable display unit is provided.
The derivation operation receiving means activates the operation of the derivation operation means after the operation is received by the start operation receiving means and after the activation condition is satisfied (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 31).
The information display means starts displaying the operation mode information at a timing earlier than the timing when the activation condition is satisfied (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 31).
According to this configuration, the operation mode of the derivation operation means can be recognized even when the acceptance of the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated.

An invalidation notification means for notifying that the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated or enabled is provided (for example, left / middle / right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R).
According to this configuration, it can be recognized that the acceptance of the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated or enabled.

When a plurality of variable display units are variable-displaying, the derivation operation receiving means operates the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display unit of one of the variable display units that are variable-displayed. In the case, for a predetermined period after the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display unit is performed, the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display unit other than the variable display unit is used. Disable the operation
The information display means continuously displays the operation mode information even when the operation of the other derivation operation means is invalidated (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 31).
According to this configuration, the operation mode of the derivation operation means can be recognized even when the acceptance of the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated.

An effect executing means (for example, a sub-control unit 91) for executing a notification effect capable of specifying the operation mode of the derived operation means is provided.
The effect executing means continuously performs the notification effect regardless of whether or not the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 31).
According to this configuration, the operation mode of the derivation operation means can be recognized even when the acceptance of the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated.

The derivation operation receiving means invalidates the operation of the derivation operation means when the power supply is stopped and the power supply is started during the variable display of the variable display unit, and is effective in relation to the variable display of the variable display unit. When the conversion condition is satisfied, the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, and the operation is enabled.
Provided is a display return means for returning the display of the operation mode information at a timing earlier than the timing at which the activation condition is satisfied when the power supply is stopped during the variable display of the variable display unit and the power supply is started. (For example, the part shown in FIG. 28)
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the derivation operation means in an erroneous operation mode.

When the power supply is stopped and the power supply is started during the variable display of the variable display unit, the activation flag indicating that the variable display unit is variable display at a constant speed is cleared and the initial drive control is performed. As a result, the variable display of the variable display unit is restored.
The derivation operation receiving means invalidates the operation of the derivation operation means until the activation condition is satisfied after the initial drive control is performed (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 29).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display unit from stopping in an unstable state.

If it is detected that the fluctuation display of the variable display unit is not performed normally when the power supply is stopped and the power supply is started during the fluctuation display of the variable display unit, the initial drive control is performed. As a result, the variable display of the variable display unit is restored.
The derivation operation receiving means invalidates the operation of the derivation operation means until it is detected that the variable display of the variable display unit is not normally performed, and the activation condition is satisfied after the initial drive control is performed. The operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated (for example, the part shown in FIG. 22B).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display unit from stopping in an unstable state.

It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Game control means (main control unit 41) that controls the game,
The effect control means (sub control unit 91) that performs the effect based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification, navigation effect) capable of identifiablely notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the derived operation means, and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. The notification state control means for controlling the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed) in which the (order) is notified, and the notification state control means.
Specific control information for transmitting specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). Transmission means (internal winning command setting process),
Including
In the specific control information transmitting means, the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) is the notification target result (notification) regardless of whether or not the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed) is controlled. The specific control information (second internal winning command) that can specify that the notification target result has been obtained but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order that is advantageous for the player) when the target combination) is obtained. It is characterized in that it is transmitted to the effect control means.
According to this feature, in a configuration in which the game control means and the effect control means are provided and the information regarding the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means, the operation procedure is performed on the game control means side. The notification means controls the notification state in which an advantageous operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified, and the game control means controls the determination result of the prior determination means to the notification target result regardless of whether or not the notification means is controlled to the notification state. When becomes, the fact that the notification target result has been obtained can be specified, but the advantageous operation mode cannot be specified. Specific control information is transmitted to the effect control means. Regardless of this, since the advantageous operation procedure according to the determination result of the prior determination means is not specified from the specific control information, the process related to the transmission of the specific control information can be simplified and the effect control means side is illegal. Even if this is done, it is possible to prevent the advantageous operation mode from being notified in a state where the notification state is not controlled.

The operation mode of the derivation operation means is an operation mode in which the derivation operation means is operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode in which the operation mode is operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation based on a combination thereof. Aspects and the like are applicable.

It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Game control means (main control unit 41) that controls the game,
The effect control means (sub control unit 91) that performs the effect based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification, navigation effect) capable of identifiablely notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the derived operation means, and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Numerical value setting means for setting different numerical values (winning numbers) for each determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery), and
Predetermined control means that performs predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) according to the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means.
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. The notification state control means for controlling the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed) in which the (order) is notified, and the notification state control means.
Specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means, and
Including
As the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result (notification target combination) is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range (2 to 19, 23 to 34) is assigned. And
In the specific control information transmitting means, at least in a state other than the notification state (a state in which navigation notification is executed), the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means is within the predetermined numerical range (2 to 19). 23 to 34), the specific control information (second), which can specify that the notification target result (notification target combination) has been obtained, but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous for the player). (Internal winning command) is transmitted to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91).
According to this feature, in a configuration in which the game control means and the effect control means are provided and the information regarding the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means, the operation procedure is performed on the game control means side. The notification means controls the notification state in which an advantageous operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified, and the game control means controls the notification state when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the notification target result at least in a state other than the notification state. Since the specific control information that can identify the result of the notification target but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode is transmitted to the effect control means, it can be specified regardless of whether or not the game control means controls the notification state. Since the advantageous operation procedure according to the determination result of the prior determination means is not specified from the control information, the advantageous operation mode is notified in a state where the notification state is not controlled even if the effect control means side is fraudulent. It can be prevented from being stowed. Further, as a numerical value set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the game control means determines whether or not the notification target result. , Since it can be determined whether or not the numerical value used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target result, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the specific control information.

The operation mode of the derivation operation means is an operation mode in which the derivation operation means is operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode in which the operation mode is operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation based on a combination thereof. Aspects and the like are applicable.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control part. It is a figure for explaining about the lottery target role about a re-game among the lottery target roles in an internal lottery, the game state to be a lottery target, the setting difference, the presence or absence of an AT lottery, and whether or not it is a navigation target. .. Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, which are the lottery target roles in the internal lottery, the lottery target roles related to AT control, the game status to be drawn, the setting difference, the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and the navigation target. It is a figure for demonstrating whether or not it becomes. For the lottery target roles in the internal lottery that are not related to AT control among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, the game status, setting difference, presence / absence of AT lottery, and navigation target It is a figure for demonstrating whether or not it becomes. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination which stops according to the stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination which stops according to the stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure which shows the winning number of a special role in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by a main control unit, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number. It is a figure which shows the winning number of the small winning combination and the replay winning combination, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number in the 2nd internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. This is a flow chart that shows the control contents of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the navigation number which the main control part notifies by the navigation notification. This is a flow chart that shows the control contents of the push order command setting process performed by the main control unit. This is a flow chart that shows the control contents of the winning judgment command setting process performed by the main control unit. This is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which the stop operation activation condition is satisfied in the reel rotation process. This is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which the stop operation activation condition is satisfied in the reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the reel rotation error in the reel rotation processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in the reel rotation processing after power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game auxiliary display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode by the navigation notification. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 and 2 of the notification mode by a navigation notification. It is a figure which shows the notification mode by error notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display before and after a power failure. This is a timing chart showing the selection status of the reel motor excitation pattern in game control. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display when an error occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the game assist indicator when the operation of a stop switch is invalidated in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure which shows the signal which is input / output between a slot machine and a test apparatus. It is a front view of the housing which shows the internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the display example of the gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the aggregation method of the data displayed on the gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the data which is extracted in the extraction process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode by navigation notification in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of a special role in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit in Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the general combination and the re-game combination in the 2nd internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit in Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control part in Example 3. FIG.

A mode for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

When the first embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a housing 1a having an open front surface and a housing 1a of the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. It is composed of a front door 1b rotatably supported at a side end.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference are arranged. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged like this.

As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", and "cherry" are formed on the outer circumferences of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. Twenty-one each of a plurality of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "b", "bell", "replay a", "replay b", and "plum" are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at substantially the center of the front door 1b.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by the corresponding reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, there are reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the back. , Are provided. Further, the reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be independently irradiated.

A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that has transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and passes through the transmission region 51b and the perspective window 3 corresponding to the perspective window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b has a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). MAXBET switch 6, which is operated when setting the maximum number of bets among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within that range, and the setting of medals and bets stored as credits. Settlement switch 10, which is operated when the medals used for the above are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and the number of bets are returned), the start switch 7, which is operated when the game is started, reels 2L, 2C. The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotation of the 2Rs is stopped, and the effect switch 56, which is used for the effect, are provided so as to be operable by the player.

In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started rotation, the reel that stops first is referred to as the first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is referred to as the second stop reel, the stop is referred to as the second stop, the reel that stops third is referred to as the third stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the third stop. Alternatively, it is called a final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, information that can identify the stop order of the reels by the navigation notification described later, 1 BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 1, and 2 sets of the number of bets. 2BETLED15 that notifies by lighting that the medals are being inserted, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 3, insertion request LED17 that notifies by lighting that the medal can be inserted, and the game by operating the start switch 7. A start effective LED18 that notifies by lighting that the start operation is valid, and a lighting that notifies that the wait (a state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reel because a certain period of time has not passed since the previous game start) is in progress. A game display unit 13 is provided with a weighting LED 19 and a replaying LED 20 for notifying by lighting that a replay game is in progress.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 4) is provided to notify by lighting that the operation of setting the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is effective, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. Inside the effect switch 56, an effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) is provided to notify by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later and a reset operation for canceling a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and a change of a setting value described later. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time while checking the inside or the set value, and a hit that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger. Stop switch 36a for selecting enable / disable of the stop function, automatic control to automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined trigger The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting the enable / disable of the settlement function and the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided on the side of the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided inside the housing 1a. Alternatively, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either one of the medal payout outlet 9 sides, a medal insertion unit 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side, and an insertion medal sensor. A medal selector 29 having a slot sensor 26 for detecting the insertion of foreign matter on the upstream side of 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

Inside the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, are located. Reel unit 2 composed of detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. The hopper tank 34a, the hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 4), and the payout sensor 34c for detecting the medal paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 (see FIG. 4) are provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front surface of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. However, in the setting change state, the reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery described later, and the power supply that is operated when the power is turned on / off. A switch 39 is provided.

Since the power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation possessed by a clerk or the like, the power supply box 100 is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100. The setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 can be operated only by a person such as a clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after opening the front door 1b by key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the amusement park. It is possible to operate.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the number of bets is set using credits. To use the credit, operate the MAXBET switch 6. When the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, that amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage is used as the winning line. It has been decided. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to make it easier to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning, the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 to 4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM1 to 4 are not determined to win by the combination of the symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to 4, but are invalid lines when the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning. By configuring the combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that will be awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the winning line LN are the symbols that constitute a specific winning. This makes it easier to recognize that the combinations are complete.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, and the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower stage of the invalid lines LM1 and the reel 2L set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage. , The lower row of reel 2C, the lower row of reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower row, the upper row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, the lower row of reel 2R, that is, lined up downward to the right. However, there are four types of invalid line LM: invalid line LM3 set across the symbols, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

Further, in this embodiment, as a winning combination, when a predetermined combination of symbols defined as a winning combination (for example, "bell-watermelon-cherry b") is prepared, a prize is awarded and a predetermined symbol is obtained. By aligning the combinations, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a symbol combination (for example, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") that is an index that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination, and thus the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 Includes roles that can be made to appear as if they have won a prize by combining the symbols that match any of the above. In the following, when a predetermined combination of symbols is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of symbols aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is referred to as a symbol combination as an index, and a combination of symbols as an index is configured. The symbol is called an index symbol.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3.

Then, when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) predetermined on the winning line is the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. If the game is stopped as a result, a prize will be generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize will be given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the maximum number of credits (50 in this embodiment) is reached, the medals are directly paid out from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, the winning may be determined based on the combination of the display results derived to all the two or more reels. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start the fluctuation of the symbol, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is stopped, and the symbol is displayed as stopped. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute and change the symbol for 80 x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames, so that a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn in 190 ms. You will be able to do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are up to 4 frames ahead of them, for a total of 5 frames.

Therefore, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed at the bottom of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol is up to 4 frames ahead. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L and 8R is operated in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Designs arranged within 5 frames including the above can be displayed on the winning line.

In the following, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels when it is not necessary to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. Further, the operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 controls the game state. The effect is controlled according to the above, and the drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each part.

An AC100V power supply is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage required for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, so that the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, the above-mentioned hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door opening. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 described above are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected and are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41, which will be described later, mounted on the game control board 40.

Further, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a game machine information display composed of a 7-segment display is displayed below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. The vessel 50 is arranged. In the game machine information display 50, the display contents can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and the display contents are aggregated by the main control unit 41 described later. , The clerk or the like can recognize the information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

The game control board 40 has a main control unit 41 that performs processing related to the progress of the game and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and a control that generates a control clock. Main control by taking in the detection signals input from the clock generation circuit 42, the random clock generation circuit 43 that generates the random clock, and the switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101. The switch detection circuit 44 to be transmitted to the unit 41, the motor drive circuit 45 to transmit the motor drive signal (phase signal of the stepping motor) output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the main control unit 41. The solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from is transmitted to the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 is transmitted to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. When the voltage of the LED drive circuit 47 and the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power failure detection circuit that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41. 48 and a reset circuit 49 that gives a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off are mounted.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, and the like.

The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various variable data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores the variable data, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. Variable data read operation to read various variable data, CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, parallel input port 511, serial communication circuit 512, etc., CPU 41a Is also used to output various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area or the like for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. Further, in this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but the command is transmitted via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be used.

The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and responds to the change in the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process of gradual migration. Further, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, the process of repeating the timer interrupt process (main) between this time and the next time according to the control state always completes at least one cycle.

An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. Further, an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51, an effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, and a reel LED 55 is connected, and these effect devices are controlled by a sub-control unit 91 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. It is designed to be driven based on.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be used. The output of the effect device is controlled by both units. Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and for example, a mechanically driven display is used. A device or a mechanically driven role object may be applied as a directing device.

The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 composed of a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d to control the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The display control circuit 92 that controls the display, the effect LED 52, the LED drive circuits 93a to 93a that control the drive of the reel LED 55, the audio output circuit 94 that controls the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the power-on. A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when an initialization command is not input from the sub CPU 91a for a certain period of time, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90. The 96, the clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that fact is substituting. A power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs to the CPU 91a, other circuits, and the like are mounted.

The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect according to a program for effect control stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly.

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Executes command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of input of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command, even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed in, and even if the interrupt that triggers the timer interrupt process (sub) occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority. Further, the backup power supply is also supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power supply is supplied.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. Further, since the main control unit 41 initializes the RAM 41c as it shifts to the setting change state, the operation of changing the set value also functions as an operation of initializing the control state of the main control unit 41. Will be done.

Further, in order to confirm the set value, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the game is finished and the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value display 24 displays the setting value read from the RAM 41c, so that the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is impossible, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to the state in which the progress is possible.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power failure process (main) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal or not at the next return is performed. Run.

Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM abnormality error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormality error state, and the progress of the game is disabled.

The error state shifts to the normal error state that is canceled by the reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. The RAM error state is a special error state, including the special error state without, and once controlled to the RAM error error state, it shifts to the setting change state and is released until a new setting value is set. Will not be done.

Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, the sub control unit 91 also determines. At the next return, the power interruption process (sub) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal is executed.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, provided that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, the RAM 91c is only initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Further, even if it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation, the sub control unit 91 is activated when it receives a setting command described later indicating that the setting has been changed from the main control unit 41. The RAM 91c is initialized even when neither the return command nor the setting command, which will be described later, indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been restored is received even after a certain period of time has elapsed. In this case as well, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is provided on the condition that the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. Can be started. In this embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the gaming state.

Then, in this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated, so that the following is valid. A winning line is obtained when a combination of symbols called roles is arranged on the winning line (the winning line is simply called the winning line). The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

The types of winning roles are determined according to the game status, but they can be broadly divided into small winning roles that involve payout of medals and re-starting the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There is a gaming role and a special role that involves a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replaying role will be collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the game state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these winning combinations, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags for the special winning combination are , It is valid until the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. The internal lottery is performed before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7) whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations. Is determined at the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random number value (an integer of 0 to 65535) for the internal lottery is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the number of determination values of each winning combination determined according to the current gaming state, the number of bets, and the set value. It is determined whether or not to allow the prize.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the winning combination, the current game state, and the set value to be the target of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the numbers are added and the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of determination values.

Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stopping control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the like.

When the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, in which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storage work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general combination. It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when the special role is won, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. A general role winning flag indicating that effect is set in the general role storage work. If neither combination nor combination of combinations is won, the special combination storage work and the general combination storage work are cleared.

Further, in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not to control the AT in a state where it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and whether or not to add the remaining number of games of the AT in the state where it is controlled by the AT. It is determined. If the AT is won in the internal lottery, it is subsequently controlled by the AT, and if the addition of the number of remaining games of the AT is won, the number of winning games is added to the number of remaining games of the AT.

Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 uses the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating remains. Refer to it and create a stop control table for each spinning reel. Then, when any operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referenced stop control table is slipped. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of 4 symbols to stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation to stop the reel, and stop when the stop operation is detected. The stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to 5 symbols including the operation position.

In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning winning combinations can be stopped together on the winning line within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop the winning combination, and control is performed to stop the winning combination without aligning it within a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the special role and the small role are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the small role is won, the maximum on the winning line is when the stop operation is performed. If it is possible to align and stop the winning small wins in the pull-in range of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them, and the small wins that are won in the pull-in range of up to 4 frames are placed on the winning line. If it is not possible to draw in, if it is possible to align and stop the winning special roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, control will be performed to align and stop them, and the winning combination will be stopped. Control is performed so that the four frames are stopped without being aligned within the pull-in range of four frames. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special winning combination, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn in. If the special role and the small role can be drawn in at the same time, only the small role will be drawn in, and the small role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special role. Also, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control to align the special role on the winning line is prioritized over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn in, the small role is placed on the winning line. Alignment control may be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the re-game combination is won, the stop operation is performed. At that time, control is performed so that the symbols of the replaying combination are aligned and stopped within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-game combination or the symbols constituting the re-game combination to be won at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, all the replay roles will be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-game combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-game combination is sure to win the prize. If the special role and the re-game role can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-game role will be drawn in, and the special role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the re-game role.

In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed using a stop control table that can specify the number of slip frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. However, the stop position that can specify the stop position can be specified. A configuration that specifies the stop position from the table and stops the reel at the specified stop position, and searches for a stop position that can be stopped at the timing when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or stop position table. Configuration that performs stop control to specify and stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, stop without using the stop control table or stop position table A configuration in which stop control by searching and specifying a stop position may be used together, or a configuration in which a stop control table or a stop position table is partially changed to perform stop control may be used.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reel is started after the start of the game, that is, the time when the rotation of the reel is started. After the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which the time counting is started from the time point is equal to or longer than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed from the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that point, the rotation of the reel for the game in the game is started. On the other hand, after the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which the time counting is started from the time point is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed from the reel rotation start time of the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started at that time. Instead, it waits until the game time at which counting starts from the start of reel rotation of the previous game reaches the specified time, and when the specified time is reached, the rotation of the reel is started.

Next, a command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 gives the sub control unit 91 a number of input commands, a credit command, a game state command, an AT state command, an internal winning command, a push order command, a reel acceleration information command, and an acceleration completion command. , Stop operation command, number of slip frames command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command, setting command, setting confirmation command, Send multiple types of commands, including door commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the type of the command and 1-byte extended data indicating the content of the command, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of the command from the type data.

The number of inserted medals command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. , Or when a medal is inserted in a state where the specified number of bets is not set, or when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets, the medal is transmitted. Further, since the insertion number command is transmitted when the bet number setting operation is performed, it is possible to identify that the bet number setting operation has been performed by receiving the insertion number command.

The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, and in a state where a specified number of bets is set. Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

The AT state command is a command that can specify whether or not AT is in progress, the number of games remaining in AT, and the like, which will be described later, and is transmitted when the game starts and after the game state command.

The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the AT state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not a special winning combination has been won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not a general winning combination has been won. After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and the stop accompanying the stop operation of each reel. Each time control is performed, it is sent after the stop command is sent. In a game in which the navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which the navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. A push order command that cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted until the order is confirmed, and a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted from the time when the advantageous stop order is determined. NS.

The game state command, AT state command, and internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. Therefore, by receiving these commands, the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. It is possible to identify that.

The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts as the game progresses, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts as the game progresses.

The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game is completed, and after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started when the game is started, all of them are first performed. It is transmitted when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed.

The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and is used for the stop operation of each reel. It is transmitted every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

The number of sliding frames command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the number of sliding frames that move from the stop operation of the corresponding reel to the stop. Therefore, each time the stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted and then transmitted.

The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and is a stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel. Is sent after the corresponding slip frame count command is sent each time.

The stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command can all specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and are accompanied by the stop operation of each reel. Since it is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, it is possible to specify that the stop operation of any of the reels has been performed and the reel to be stopped by receiving these commands.

The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

The winning judgment command is a command that can specify whether or not there is a winning, the combination of symbols aligned on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. It is when the stop switch is pressed and the stop switch is released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

Both the game end command and the winning judgment command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch. Therefore, by receiving these commands, It is possible to identify that all the operations necessary for advancing one game have been completed.

The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize or settlement of credits (including the medal used for setting the number of bets) is started. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize and settlement of credits is completed.

The standby command is a command indicating that the game shifts to the standby state, and when the game shifts to the standby state after the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without setting the bet number after one game ends, a credit is given. It is sent after the payout of medals (including the medals used to set the bet number) is completed and the payout end command is sent.

The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, when the ending effect waiting time elapses, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error state and the type of error state. When an error is determined and controlled to an error state, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state and its type is sent and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is cleared, an error command indicating the error state is cleared is sent.

The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power failure.

The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, the setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is sent, and when the setting change state ends, the setting command is sent. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is sent. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of the setting. ..

The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation command that indicates the start of the setting confirmation is sent, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the setting that indicates the end of the setting confirmation is set. A confirmation command is sent.

The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state). Is transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (on to off, off to on).

These commands are generated in the main process or the timer interrupt process (main), are temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and are transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

Next, the effect control executed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

In the timer interrupt processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer, and if an unprocessed command is stored, the earliest of them. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. are referred to based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Controls the output of various production devices. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. are displayed for each of the plurality of types of effect patterns. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 of the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among them, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, the effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and the newly received command is used. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. That is, even if the production is not completed to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the new command received is not the command that triggers the new production. The effect based on the command will be executed.

When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, it is stored in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The registered selection rate is referred to, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Therefore, even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a notification period during which navigation notification can be executed, in which the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the internal lottery according to the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state, and the player is based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination. By notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the sub-control unit 91 and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51 and the like. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state where the AT does not control the control.

6 to 8 are diagrams for explaining the game state to be drawn, the setting difference, the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and whether or not the winning combination is the target of the lottery in the internal lottery by the main control unit 41. be. Further, FIG. 9 is for explaining the transition of the gaming state (RT1 to 4, inside, RB (including RB in BB1, RB in BB2, and RB winning RB)) controlled by the main control unit 41. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, a combination of lottery target combinations read as lottery target combinations (including AT) for each game state in the internal lottery will be described.

In this embodiment, as the lottery target roles to be the target of the internal lottery, the lottery target roles related to the re-game combination (see FIG. 6), the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, and those related to the control of AT ( (See FIG. 7), lottery target roles related to small wins and special wins, which are not related to AT control (see FIG. 8) are predetermined, and each lottery target win is determined according to the game state. The number of values is set. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to "65536" in correspondence with a random number for internal lottery (integer of 0 to 65535). Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination in which "300" is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. Further, when each lottery target combination is to be selected as a lottery target according to the game state, a number of determination values of 4 or more is set in advance (indicated by "○" in FIGS. 6 to 8), and "1 If the player wins with a probability of "/ 16384" (4/65536) or higher, but is not subject to the lottery depending on the game state, 0 is set as the number of judgment values ("-"in FIGS. 6 to 8). (Indicated by), the lottery target combination is not won.

In addition, each lottery target combination includes a predetermined winning combination, and by winning one lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the lottery target combination is allowed to win. As a result, the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination for which the winning is permitted is stopped in line on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the winning is generated. Then, according to the winning combination of the symbol combinations stopped on the winning line LN, if the winning combination is a replaying combination, a replay is given, and if the winning combination is a small combination, the winning combination is given. A predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning combination, and if the winning combination is a special combination, the winning combination is controlled to a special state.

In addition, some of the lottery target combinations that are subject to the internal lottery include the AT, and at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, the lottery target roles including the AT are not controlled by the AT. By winning, it will be decided to control the AT. In addition, at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, it is decided that the number of remaining games of the AT will be added by winning the lottery target combination including the AT while being controlled by the AT, and the winning AT The number of additional games determined in advance according to the type of the lottery target combination including the above will be added to the number of remaining games of the AT. In this embodiment, some of the lottery target combinations include AT, and the AT and the additional game are won by winning the lottery target combination including AT, but the lottery target including AT is configured. When the winning combination is won, only the AT lottery that decides whether to control the AT and the additional lottery that decides whether to give the extra game are decided, and the lottery target including the AT is decided by the internal lottery. When the AT lottery and the additional lottery are performed with the winning combination as an opportunity, and by winning the lottery, the AT and the additional game can be won, that is, when deciding whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game. In addition, the second stage lottery may be performed when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game, the AT is determined based only on the result of the internal lottery, and the number of additional games is determined by the result of the internal lottery. The configuration may be determined by performing a second-stage lottery when a predetermined result is obtained. Further, when the main control unit 41 decides whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game, the main control unit 41 performs the second stage lottery for the AT when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. The number of additional games may be determined based only on the result of the internal lottery. Further, the main control unit 41 may have a configuration in which a lottery of three or more stages is performed when deciding whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game.

In addition, regarding the lottery target roles related to the special role among the lottery target roles, the game state is the normal game state in which the special role is not carried over, the carryover state in which the special role is carried over (internal), or the special state. At least one of the lottery target combination that is the target of the internal lottery or the number of judgment values (winning probability) differs depending on whether it is a certain RB (including RB in BB1, 2), and for the lottery target combination related to the small combination, the game state is Lottery target for internal lottery depending on whether it is in the normal game state, carried over (internal), RB in BB1 (BB1), RB in BB2 (BB2), or RB by RB winning (RB in the figure) At least one of the winning combination or the number of judgment values (winning probability) is different, and the lottery target winning combination related to the re-gaming combination is internally depending on whether the gaming state is RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4. At least one of the lottery target combination to be the target of the lottery or the number of judgment values (winning probability) thereof is different.

As shown in FIG. 6, as the lottery target roles related to the re-game, the normal re-game, the RT2 transition re-game 1, the RT2 transition re-game 2, the RT2 transition re-game 3, the RT2 transition re-game 4, the RT2 transition re-game 5, RT2 Transition re-game 6, RT3 transition re-game, RT1 transition re-game 1, RT1 transition re-game 2, RT1 transition re-game 3, RT1 transition re-game 4, RT1 transition re-game 5, RT1 transition re-game 6, advantageous state transition re-game Game 1, advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, advantageous state transition re-game 2, advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are included. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more re-game roles as winning roles, and if the lottery target role related to re-game is won in the internal lottery, one of the re-game roles will always win a prize. Then, a replay game (replay game) is given.

In RT0, among the lottery target roles related to the re-game, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, and the number of judgment values of 0 is set for the other lottery target roles related to the re-game. .. Further, in RT1, for the normal re-game, the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, a judgment value number of 4 or more is set, and the number of judgment values is set to 4 or more. For the lottery target combination, the number of determination values of 0 is set. Further, in RT2, a judgment value number of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, the RT3 transition re-game, the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT. For the other lottery target combinations related to the replay, the number of determination values of 0 is set. Further, in RT3, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, and related to other re-games. For the lottery target combination, the number of determination values of 0 is set. In addition, in the inside, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, and it is invalid for the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, and is read in the internal lottery. It is not issued, and the number of judgment values of 0 is set for the lottery target combination related to other replay games. Further, in the RB, the number of determination values of 0 is set for the lottery target combination related to these replays.

In this embodiment, the lottery target combination for which the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set can be won by the internal lottery in the gaming state in which the number of judgment values is set, and is considered as a substantial lottery target. However, the lottery target combination for which the number of determination values of 0 is set is not actually won by the internal lottery in the game state in which the number of determination values is set, and is not a substantial lottery target. For example, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are subject to a substantial lottery in any of the game states because the number of determination values of 4 or more is set in each of the game states. , The advantageous state transition re-game 1 and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 are not subject to a substantial lottery in any of the game states because the number of determination values of 0 is set in any of the game states.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, there is no setting difference for the lottery target combination related to the re-game, and the winning is won by the internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the set value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. do.

In addition, among the lottery target combinations related to the re-game, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are subject to the AT lottery, and when the lottery target combination is won without being controlled by the AT. , AT is won, and when the lottery target combination is won while being controlled by AT, the additional number of games remaining in AT is won. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to other replay games is won, it means that the AT has not been won (non-winning).

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the re-game, RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and these lottery target roles are won while being controlled by the AT. When this happens, navigation notification is performed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, and the lottery target roles related to the control of AT, are cherry, cherry + AT, watermelon, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2. , Push order bell 3, Push order bell 4, Push order bell 5, Push order bell 6, SB, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry, BB1 + Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon, BB1 + Watermelon + AT , BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small roles and special roles as prize-winning roles, and if the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles are won in the internal lottery, they will be selected as prize-winning roles. When a small role wins, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out, and when a special role wins as a winning role, it is controlled to a special state according to the special role, and none of the winning roles wins. When it happens, it will be off.

Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles in RT0-3 and inside, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, For push order bell 6, SB, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon + AT, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set, and small and special roles are set. Among the lottery target roles, the number of judgment values of 0 is set for cherry, watermelon, RB + cherry, RB + watermelon, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + watermelon, BB2 + cherry, and BB2 + watermelon. In addition, in RB, among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, cherry, watermelon, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6 The number of judgment values of 4 or more is set, and among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + For cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT, the number of determination values of 0 is set.

In this embodiment, in the RB, the number of determination values of the lottery target combination (small combination + AT, special combination + small combination + AT, special combination + AT) including AT is set to 0, so that during RB (in BB1, In BB2, RB), the number of ATs and AT additional games described later is not won, but even in RB, the number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT is set to 4 or more. The AT and the number of additional games of AT may be won, and as such a configuration, for example, a difference is provided in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. In the RB controlled by the winning of a special role that has not been performed, the number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT may be 4 or more, and the number of additional games of AT and AT may be won, or the slot machine. The number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT in the RB controlled by the winning of the special combination, which has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value (1 to 6) of 1. May be set to 4 or more, and the number of ATs and AT additional games may be won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, there is no setting difference between the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination, and the lottery target combination related to the control of the AT, and the slot Winning by internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the set value (1 to 6) of machine 1.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon + AT are subject to the AT lottery. When the lottery target combination is won without being controlled by the AT, it means that the lottery target combination is won, and when the lottery target combination is won while being controlled by the AT, the number of remaining games of the AT is The addition is won. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to the control of the AT is won, which is the lottery target combination related to other small roles and special roles, the AT is not won (non-winning).

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, the push order bells 1 to 6 are the navigation targets, and when these lottery target roles are won while being controlled by the AT, the navigation notification is sent. Will be done. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to the other small combination and the special combination and related to the AT control is won, the navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled.

In addition, in the inside and RB (including RB in RB, RB in BB1 and RB in BB2), the special role, the special role + AT, and the special role + general role are not subject to the internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 8, the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role and not related to the AT control include bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. Is done. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small roles, special roles, and replaying roles as winning roles, and when the lottery target roles related to the small roles and special roles are won in the internal lottery, When a small role wins a prize, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out, and when a special role wins a prize, it is controlled to a special state according to the special role and specially replayed as a prize. When a game wins, a replay game (replay game) is given, and when none of the winning combinations wins, it is lost.

Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles in RT0 to 3, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. .. Further, in RB, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for the bell, and the number of determination values is set to 0 for RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, and BB2, BB2 + special replay.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, for the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination and not related to the AT control, the setting difference is provided for each of the lottery target combinations, and the slot machine. Winning in an internal lottery with different probabilities depending on the set value (1 to 6) of 1.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, none of Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay is subject to AT lottery, and these lottery target roles are When winning, the AT and the number of additional games will be out of the question.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay are not subject to navigation, and these lottery target roles were won. Occasionally, navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT.

Next, the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the outline of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

In this embodiment, in the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and special roles (RB, BB1, BB2) are carried over as normal gaming states, and a bonus is given as a special state. (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2) is included, and is controlled to any one of the gaming states.

RT0 shifts at the end of the bonus (BB1, RB). Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT0 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or when SB wins a prize, or when a special role is won. It ends by moving to the inside. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

In RT1, at RT0, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or SB wins, and at RT2 and RT3, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or RT1 transition again. The game shifts when the SB wins a prize. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT1, the RT1 is terminated by shifting to RT2 by winning the RT2 transition re-game or by shifting to the inside by winning a special role. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

RT2 shifts when the RT2 transition re-game wins in RT1. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or shifts to RT3 when the RT3 transition re-game wins. Or, it ends when a special role is won and moves to the inside. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% at least when the stop operations are performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

RT3 shifts when the RT3 transition re-game wins in RT2. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT3, the RT3 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or when the RT1 transition replay or SB wins a prize. It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% at least when the stop operations are performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

Inside, RT0-3 will be transferred by winning special roles (RB, BB1, BB2). Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the interior, the special role that triggered the transition to the interior wins a bonus (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2). It ends by migrating. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

The RB (RB) shifts inside by winning the RB. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or a prize is won 6 times. Further, in the RB, the special role and the re-game combination are excluded from the internal lottery, and the winning probability of the small role is higher than RT0 to 3 and has a high probability (about 1 / 1.0), and per game. The medal payout rate exceeds 100%.

BB1 and BB2 (RB) are transferred inside by winning BB1 and BB2. Then, in BB1 and BB2, regardless of the number of games after the transition to BB1 and BB2, the total number of medals paid out during BB1 and BB2 exceeds the specified number (316 in this embodiment). finish. Further, in BB1 and BB2, the above-mentioned RB is always controlled, and in the RB in BB1 and BB2, the special combination and the re-game combination are excluded from the internal lottery. Therefore, the winning probability of the small combination is determined. It has a higher probability (about 1 / 1.0) than RT0-3, and the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

Among the bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2) in RT0 to 3, the inside, the bonus (RB, BB1, BB2) has the highest medal payout rate per game, and is the most advantageous gaming state. Further, among RTs 0 to 3, RTs 2 and 3 have a higher probability of winning the re-game combination, and the medal payout rate per game is higher than that of RT0 and 1, which is higher than that of RT0 and 1. It can be said that it is in an advantageous state for. Further, among RT2, 3 and the inside, RT2, 3 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than the inside in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of the inside.

Next, a combination of symbols that stop on the winning line LN of the reel according to the type of the lottery target combination and the stop order of the internal lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, when RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. .. The RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least the RT2 transition re-game combination and the normal re-game combination as winning combinations, and the RT2 transition re-game combination is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. It is a transitional combination in which the game state is shifted to RT2 as well as the above, and the normal re-gaming combination includes a re-gaming combination in which a replay game is only given by winning a prize.

For example, when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the stop order in which the left reel is stopped as the first stop, the middle reel is stopped as the second stop, and the right reel is stopped as the third stop). If this is done, the combination of symbols that make up the RT2 transition reel game will stop on the winning line LN, but if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the left, middle, and right stop order, it will normally be replayed. The combination of symbols constituting the game combination stops on the winning line LN. Further, when the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won, the same as when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of symbols constituting the RT2 transition replay combination stops on the winning line LN, while the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, which is usually the case. The combination of symbols constituting the re-game combination stops on the winning line LN.

As a result, when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in RT1, the RT2 transition re-game combination is won by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the type is intentionally used. It is not possible to select the stop order according to, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT2 by winning the RT2 transition re-game combination, but if the stop order does not match, the normal re-game combination Will win and RT1 will be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, a combination of symbols that stop according to the type and stop order. Is different. The RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least the RT1 transition re-game combination and the normal re-game combination as winning combinations, and the RT1 transition re-game combination is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional combination in which the game state is shifted to RT1, and the normal replaying combination is a replaying combination in which a replay game is only given by winning a prize.

When the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, if the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the symbols constituting the normal re-game combination. When the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order while the combination of symbols stops on the winning line LN, the combination of symbols constituting the RT1 transition replay combination stops on the winning line LN. ..

As a result, when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in RT2 and RT3, the normal re-game combination is won by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the re-game combination is intentionally won. It is not possible to select the stop order according to the type, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to avoid the transition to RT1 by winning the normal replay combination, but the stop order must match. If this is the case, the RT1 transition replay combination will win a prize and be transferred to RT1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when the RT3 transition re-game is won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. There is no. The RT3 transition re-game includes at least the RT3 transition re-game as a winning combination, and the RT3 transition re-game is a re-game in which a replay game is given by winning a prize and the game state is changed to RT3. It is a transition role to be migrated.

When the RT3 transition re-game is won, the combination of symbols constituting the RT3 transition re-game combination stops on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the RT3 transition re-game is won in RT2, the RT3 transition re-game wins a prize regardless of the stop order, and the RT3 transition re-game wins the prize, so that the RT3 shifts to RT3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, even when the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the symbols are stopped according to the type and the stop order. The combination is not different. The advantageous state transition re-game 1 includes at least the advantageous state transition re-game combination 1 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination 1 is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional role that shifts to an advantageous state (a state in which AT is controlled). Further, the advantageous state transition re-game 2 includes at least an advantageous state transition re-game combination 2 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination 2 is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional role that shifts to an advantageous state (a state in which AT is controlled).

When the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won, the combination of the symbols constituting the winning advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 is stopped on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won in RTs 1 to 3, the advantageous state transition re-game combination wins, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination wins, so that the advantageous state shifts to the advantageous state. It will be migrated.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. The push order bells 1 to 6 include at least a bell and a special small winning combination as winning combinations, and the bell is a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. In addition, the special small winning combination is a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, which is smaller than that at the time of winning the bell.

For example, when the push order bell 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the stop order in which the left reel is stopped as the first stop, the middle reel is stopped as the second stop, and the right reel is stopped as the third stop). In that case, while the combination of symbols that make up the bell stops on the winning line LN, if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order of left, middle, and right, the symbols that make up the special small winning combination. The combination of the above or the combination of the specific symbols without the awarding of medals stops on the winning line LN. Further, when the push order bells 2 to 6 are won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order predetermined according to the type of the push order bells 2 to 6, as in the case where the push order bell 1 is won. When this is done, the combination of symbols that make up the bell stops on the winning line LN, while if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the symbols that make up the special small winning combination A combination or a combination of specific symbols without medals is stopped on the winning line LN.

Therefore, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the medals are operated in the stop order according to the types of the push order bells 1 to 6. Further, particularly in RT2 and RT3, since the specific symbol stops when the stop order does not match, if the stop order does not match, the process shifts to RT1 at a constant rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when the SB is won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the specific symbols constituting the SB winning priority are given priority to the winning line regardless of the stop order. Stop at LN. Therefore, in RTs 0 to 3, when the SB is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the specific symbol can be stopped, so that the specific symbol constituting the SB winning is stopped and shifts to RT1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, when RB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry, and BB2 + cherry are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the constituent symbols of the cherries have priority regardless of the stop order. Then stop at the winning line LN. In addition, when RB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon, and BB2 + watermelon are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the constituent symbols of the watermelon are given priority and stopped at the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when these special roles + small roles are won, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the constituent symbols of the small combination can be stopped, so that the constituent symbols of the small combination are stopped and the winning special role is It will be carried over to the next game or later, and the winning special role will be stopped by the stop operation at the timing when the composition symbol of the small role cannot be stopped and the composition symbol of the winning special role can be stopped. The composition symbol of is stopped, and it will be transferred to the bonus.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when BB1 + special re-game and BB2 + special re-game are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the configuration of the special re-game is irrespective of the stop order. The symbol has priority and stops at the winning line LN. As a result, when these special roles + special re-games are won, the constituent symbols of the special re-games are stopped, and the winning special roles are carried over to the next game or later.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming states are RT1, 2, and 3, the main control unit 41 can execute a navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT), which is the notification period.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination according to the game state, and the sub control unit 91 receives the first internal winning command. , The second internal winning command and the push order command are transmitted to execute the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91. The notification target combinations according to the game state are RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT1 is set, and RT1 shift replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT2 is set. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state where the AT is not set. In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the stopping order that is advantageous to the player is identifiable by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

In the navigation effect of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player notified by the navigation notification is notified by the display of the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation voice from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when notifying the stop order of the left middle right, a stop switch 8L such as "123" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). A stop order image showing the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left middle right!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). Is output. Further, when notifying the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as "1--" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is output. do. The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, and may be executed by using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, or the like.

In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any one of the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the RT2 transition re-game wins is identifiable. Further, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the bell wins is identifiablely notified. Further, also in RT2, when any one of RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 is won in RT3, the stop order in which the normal re-game wins is identifiablely notified. Further, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won in both RT2 and RT3, the stop order in which the bells win is identifiablely notified. In addition, when the SB is elected, the fact that the SB is elected is identifiablely notified.

In this way, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can intentionally win the RT2 transition re-game in RT1 and shift to RT2, or win the bell by performing the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation effect. In RT2 and 3, it is possible to avoid winning the RT1 transition replay by winning the normal replay, winning the bell, avoiding the stoppage of the specific symbol, and avoiding the SB winning.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to control the AT by an internal lottery. Then, when the AT is won by the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 controls the AT after a precursory period. The state from the start of AT control to the transition to RT2 is also called the preparation state. The main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification when the target combination is won in the ready state. At this time, in RT1, the navigation notification is applied when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, and the stop order for winning the RT2 transition re-game when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won is notified by the navigation notification. By performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, it is possible to win the RT2 transition re-game and shift from RT1 to RT2. In addition, after the transition to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell is notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so the medal is surely obtained by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It becomes possible.

The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the RT2 transition replay wins a prize in RT1 and shifts to RT2. Along with this, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number of games as the number of remaining AT games assigned to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining AT games. Even after shifting to RT1, the stop order for winning the bells will be notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so it is possible to reliably win medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol and avoid shifting to RT1. In addition, after the transition to RT2, the stop order for winning the normal re-game is notified when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won. Therefore, by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the RT1 transition re-game It is possible to wait until the RT3 transition combination is won, and to win the RT3 transition combination to transfer to RT3 while avoiding the winning of. It is possible to avoid shifting to RT1, and since it is notified that the SB has won when the SB is won, it is possible to avoid winning the SB and avoid shifting to RT1.

Further, after the start of the AT, the number of remaining games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, the control of the AT is terminated. Along with this, the navigation notification will not be executed, so it is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, and to avoid winning the RT1 transition regame when the RT1 transition regames 1 to 6 are won. It becomes impossible, and the control of a series of ATs is completed by shifting to RT1 by stopping the specific symbol or winning the RT1 transition re-game. Further, if the addition of the remaining games of AT is won by the internal lottery after the start of AT and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the number of winning games is added to the remaining games of AT.

Further, if the special combination is won after the start of the AT and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the AT is interrupted by the end of RT1, and the counting of the number of AT games is also interrupted accordingly. If a special role is won during AT and the AT is interrupted, then the winning special role is won and the corresponding bonus is controlled, and the specific symbol stops at RT0, which shifts after the bonus ends, to RT1. At the time of the transition, the control of the AT is resumed, and along with this, the count of the number of remaining games of the AT is resumed by shifting to RT2 again after the preparation state.

Further, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the bell wins by the navigation notification when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won during AT, and ignores the notified stop order to perform the stop operation. In some cases, the bell wins and RT2 and 3 are maintained, but in some cases, the specific symbol stops and shifts to RT1. Further, if the stop operation is performed while ignoring the notified stop order at the time of winning the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the RT1 transition re-game wins and shifts to RT1. If the game shifts from RT2, 3 to RT1 during AT, the AT continues, and the number of remaining games of AT is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted. It is possible to notify the stop order of winning the RT1 transition re-game at the time of winning of ~ 6 by navigation notification, and to win the RT1 transition re-game and shift from RT1 to RT2 by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It is possible.

Next, the control contents of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target combination, and a lottery target combination that may be carried over, that is, a special combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special combination is set. A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special winning combination number table, when none of the special winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", but the winning number of BB1, BB2, RB, SB is "1". "To" 4 "are assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, in the general winning combination winning number table, "0" is used as the winning number of the winning combination for the re-game when none of the general winning combination is won, that is, in the case of a loss. "1" to "16" are assigned, and "20" to "28" are assigned as the winning numbers of the lottery target winning combinations related to the small winning combination. In this way, in the special winning combination winning number table and the general winning combination winning number table, the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery, the combination is selected. , The winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination for which the winning is determined is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when none of the winning combinations is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared after each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. It will be cleared.

After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes the internal winning command setting process, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning are based on the internal winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, in the internal winning command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of two bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores a MODE indicating that it is the first internal winning command in the first byte, and wins a special role in the EXT of the second byte. Store the number.

In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Winning obtained by sequentially determining whether or not there is (Sf5), whether or not it is less than 15 (Sf6), whether or not it is less than 22 (Sf7), and whether or not it is less than 28 (Sf8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 for transmission winning. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step of Sf5 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 15 in the step of Sf6, that is, when the winning number is any of 2 to 14, the winning number for transmission is used. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 15 in the step of Sf6 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 22 in the step of Sf7, that is, when the winning number is either 20 or 21, the winning number is assigned. The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 22 in the step of Sf7 and less than 28 in the step of Sf8, that is, when the winning number is any of 22 to 27, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 22 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in the step of Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 28, that is, if the winning number is 28, the winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmitting winning number (Sf9).

Then, after setting the transmission winning number of the general combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps of Sf9, Sf10, and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When the main control unit 41 stores the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and serves as a general role in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission.

After storing the second internal winning command in the command queue in the step of Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmitting winning number, and the first winning number including the transmitting winning number is set. Set the internal winning command of to the command queue.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 16 to 21, 28) is set in the internal winning, the command is used. The winning number by the internal lottery can be specified based on the included sending winning number.

On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 14), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 14) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2 to 14) the winning number is based on the above, while the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 14). It is possible to identify something.

If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27), one winning number (22) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (22 to 27) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (22 to 27) the winning number is based on the above, while the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27). It is possible to identify something.

The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently executed by the timer interrupt processing (main) to the sub-control unit 91. Will be transmitted sequentially.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example and other data. The form may be used. Further, in this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes are transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and 2 of each command. Although the configuration includes the winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command and the second internal Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the 3rd byte includes the special winning transmission winning number or the general winning transmission winning number, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be composed of one signal consisting of 3 bytes, the 2nd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the special combination, and the 3rd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the general combination.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are assigned separately, that is, the special winning combination corresponding to the types and deviations of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) in the special winning combination winning number table. The winning number of the general winning combination is set, and the winning number of the general winning combination is set according to the type and the loss of the general winning combination in the general winning combination winning number table. The winning number and the winning number of the general winning combination are set in the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c, respectively, but the winning number is assigned without dividing into the special winning combination and the general winning combination, for example, "BB1", "small winning combination", and " A winning number may be assigned to each of the "BB1 + small winning combination (for example, BB1 + cherry shown in FIG. 7)" that is won at the same time. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based only on the one winning number. It is possible to determine whether or not the reels are being used, and perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

In this embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 13) that can identify a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification are assigned in advance, and a lottery is performed. Of the target combinations, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type, and the navigation number table in which the navigation number for each type of the lottery target combination is set is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 16, the navigation numbers are 0 indicating the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the first stop is the left reel 2L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 2C, showing the stop order with the third stop as the right reel 2R 1, showing the stop order with the first stop as the left reel 2L, the second stop as the right reel 2R, and the third stop as the middle reel 2C 2, first The stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the right reel 2R. Reel 2L indicates stop order 4, 1st stop is right reel 2L, 2nd stop is left reel 2L, 3rd stop is middle reel 2C 5, 1st stop is right reel 2R, 1st 2 Stops are the middle reel 2C, the third stop is the left reel 2L 6, the stop order is the left reel 2L as the first stop, that is, the left first stop is shown 7, and the middle reel 2C is the first stop. 8 is set to indicate the stop order to be performed, that is, the first stop in the middle, and 9 is set to indicate the stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, that is, the first stop on the right. In addition, as the navigation number, it suggests a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of red 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN10, and suggests a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of blue 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN11. 12 is set to suggest a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of White 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN, and 13 is set to suggest a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of BAR can be stopped at the winning line LN.

In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Any other stop order may be used as long as it is a standard push order.

In the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of special role, and 10 is set for BB1, 11 is set for BB2, 12 is set for RB, and 13 is set for SB. If the special role is not won, 0 is set.

Further, in the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of the notification target combination among the lottery target combinations, and the RT2 transition re-game 1, RT1 transition re-game 1, and push order bell 1 are described as "1". "2" is for RT2 transition re-game 2, RT1 transition re-game 2, and push order bell 2, and "3" is for RT2 transition re-game 3, RT1 transition re-game 3, and push order bell 3. , RT2 transition re-game 4, RT1 transition re-game 4, push order bell 4 "4", RT2 transition re-game 5, RT1 transition re-game 5, push order bell 5 "5", RT2 "6" is set for the transition re-game 6, the RT1 transition re-game 6, and the push order bell 6. The navigation numbers are not set for the normal re-game, the RT3 transition re-game, the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2, the cherry, the watermelon, and the bell, which are not the notification target roles among the lottery target roles.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins a general combination set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. The push order command setting process for setting the push order command according to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, in the push order command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c are acquired (Sg1), and then the RAM 41c With reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being performed, which is set in the predetermined area of, the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT, it will be described later. It is determined whether or not the condition is from the time when the conditions for implementing the special role navigation notification to the time when the special role is awarded) (Sg2). If it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is determined based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation number (Sg6).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is performed, and when it is determined in the step of Sg5 that the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is confirmed, it is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table, the navigation numbers corresponding to the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination acquired in the step of Sg1 are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation numbers.

At this time, if it is specified that the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 have been won based on the internal winning number, the combination of the RT2 transition re-games is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Set the navigation number indicating the stop order to be performed as the transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 have been won, the navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the normal re-games is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Is set as the navigation number for transmission.

In addition, when it is specified that the push order bells 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of bells is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination is set. Set the indicated navigation number as the transmission navigation number.

In addition, one of the special roles (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) is won based on the internal winning number, and the implementation conditions for the special role navigation notification (in this embodiment, after the special role is won, the predetermined game If it is specified that the number (for example, 5 games) has passed) and none of the small wins have been won (missing), the type of special win has been selected. Correspondingly, a navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol constituting the special combination is set as a transmission navigation number.

After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or the step of Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When the push order command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the push order command is a push order command in the first byte, and stores a transmission navigation number in the EXT of the second byte.

After the push order command is stored in the command queue in the step of Sg4, the push order command setting process is ended and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a push order command that can specify the stop operation mode is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also sets a push order command in the command queue that can specify the stop order, which is a standard stop operation mode.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process every time the stop operation is performed, so that the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN even when the navigation notification is not being executed. If is confirmed, a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

Further, in the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, the push order command setting process is executed, so that, for example, the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won in a state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed. In this case, when none of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the RT2 transition replay and the normal replay can be stopped, but since it is not certain which combination will be stopped, the standard navigation The number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and the push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the RT2 transition re-game and the normal transition re-game can still be stopped, and it has not been determined which combination will be stopped, so it is standard as a transmission navigation number. A push order command including a navigation number ("0") is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the RT2 transition replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the combination of stopping. Is confirmed, so even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number ("1") that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player (the stop order that wins the RT2 transition re-game) is sent. It is set as a credit navigation number. Further, when the reels other than the left reel 2L are stopped in the first stop, the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and then the reels other than the middle reel 2C are stopped as the second stop. Regardless of the order, only the normal re-game can be stopped, and the winning combination is fixed. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number (navigation number) that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. "1") is set as the transmission navigation number.

Further, even when the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won in the state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT2 transition re-game is the same as when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won. , When it is not certain which combination of the normal re-game will be stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and either the RT2 transition re-game or the normal re-game is stopped. When it is decided whether or not to do so, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player is set.

Further, for example, when the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won, and none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, RT1 The transition re-game and the normal re-game can be stopped, but since it is not certain which combination will be stopped, the standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of the RT1 transition re-game is It is set as a transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the normal re-game can be stopped, and the winning combination is determined, which is advantageous for the player even in a state where the navigation notification is not performed. A navigation number (“1”) that can specify the stop order (the stop order in which the normal re-game is won) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the RT1 transition re-game is stopped, so that the navigation number ("" 1 ”) is set as the transmission navigation number.

Further, even when the RT1 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won in a state where the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT1 transition re-game 1 is transferred in the same manner as when the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won. When it is uncertain whether the re-game or normal re-game will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and either the RT1 transition re-game or the normal re-game combination is set. When it is decided whether or not to stop, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player is set.

Also, even if the push order bells 1 to 6 are won without the navigation notification being performed, either the bell or the special small role or the role of the special small role is the same as when the RT2 transition replay games 1 to 6 are won. When it is not certain whether the specific symbol will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and when it is decided which combination or specific symbol will stop, it is advantageous for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a different stop order (stop order for winning a bell) is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification target combination is elected in the state where the main control unit 41 is not controlling the AT, the player is at the timing when the stop order advantageous to the player is determined. A push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (the combination in which there are three advantageous stop orders for the player), and the six-choice combination (game). In a combination in which there are six stop orders that are advantageous to the player, for example, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, and push order bells 1 to 6) of the present embodiment, the first stop operation is performed. Therefore, it is the timing when it is determined that the winning combination for the player does not stop, or the timing when the second stop operation is performed.

In addition, in the game after the special role has been won and the conditions for implementing the prescribed navigation notification have been met, the internal lottery result shows that none of the small roles have been won. In that case, a push order command including a navigation number ("10" to "13") suggesting a symbol constituting one special role that has been won is set.

The push order command set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment is subsequently transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main).

Then, when the sub control unit 91 is specified to perform navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the above-mentioned first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target combination is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than "0" based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the push order advantageous to the player is other than the standard push order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. To display. Further, in the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image suggesting a winning combination based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the notification target combination, the possibility of winning the bell is suggested by displaying the image of the "bell", and the RT2 transition replay games 1 to 6 are displayed. 6. If RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, there is a possibility of winning a prize based on the game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command or the like. The type of group (any of RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6) is specified, and the combination included in the specified re-game combination (for example, in RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, RT2 transition is performed. In the re-game and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a winning role that is advantageous to the player by performing the effect according to the re-game).

Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the re-game combination group in the navigation effect, for example, even if RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side. , As the winning number for transmitting the second internal winning command, "2" indicating the winning of either RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 or RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 will be uniformly set, but the sub The control unit 91 shifts to RT1 by specifying that the transmission winning number is "2" based on the second internal winning command and that the game state is RT2 based on the game state command or the like. It is possible to identify that the re-games 1 to 6 have been won, and to win a normal re-game by operating according to the stop order with an image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. By displaying an image suggesting sex (in this embodiment, an image showing a combination of symbols constituting the normal re-game), a role that is advantageous to the player among the roles included in the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 (in this embodiment). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect according to the role of maintaining RT2).

Further, when it is specified that the special role has been won based on the first internal winning command as an effect suggesting the winning of the special role in the navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 then performs the above-mentioned special role. When the predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) for which the conditions for implementing the navigation notification are satisfied have passed, a definite notification (special role on the liquid crystal display 51) is notified that the special role has been won in the internal lottery. Displays a message, an image, etc. indicating that the player has won). Then, after the definite notification is performed, that is, after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, the navigation number specified based on the push order command suggests a predetermined symbol of the special role. In addition, by performing a stop operation at the timing when a predetermined symbol can be stopped at the winning line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect (for example, specified based on the navigation number) for promoting the winning of a special role is performed. (Display on a liquid crystal display 51 that displays an image of a predetermined pattern, etc.). In this way, the sub-control unit 91 plays a predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the execution condition of the special combination navigation notification is established on the main control unit 41 side. Since the final control notification is performed when it is determined that the special role has been performed, the main control unit 41 includes a navigation number suggesting a symbol capable of winning the special role after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied. By transmitting the push order command, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to perform the special role winning promotion effect based on the navigation number after the confirmation notification is performed.

Next, the control content of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which the winning number is set for each type of winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b. There is.

When all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 has won a prize according to the combination of the symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. The winning judgment process for determining whether or not to perform is executed. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that, the winning number corresponding to the combination of the symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with reference to the winning number table, while the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination. If it is determined that is not stopped, "0" indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is completed.

Then, after executing the winning determination processing, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination command setting process for setting the winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the winning determination command setting process, the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is obtained based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning judgment command setting process is completed. When the winning determination command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the winning determination command is a winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in the EXT of the second byte.

The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt processing (main).

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and sets the winning determination command including the winning number. The winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Further, in the winning judgment command setting process of this embodiment, the winning judgment command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning judgment processing as it is is set in the command queue, so that it can be used as a special command or the like that can specify the winning number. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. It is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute the effect.

A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit determines an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target combination is won. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to control the AT that executes the navigation notification that notifies the operation procedure of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when controlling to the AT, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result is obtained. Is transmitted to the effect control unit regardless of whether or not the AT controls the internal winning command, and the effect control unit identifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. When the unit is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect for notifying the operation procedure advantageous to the player is executed based on the specified internal lottery result.

In such a configuration, the effect control unit can specify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, so that the effect control unit is illegal. By doing so, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, the internal winning command identifies an operation procedure that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result, and the operation procedure is described. There is a possibility that it will be notified by the production control unit.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the internal lottery result as an internal winning command, and the first internal winning command and the general winning command that can specify the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can specify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is general so that it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, it is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying the stop order, the process related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified. Even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a configuration in which the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, is notified by the navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by the internal winning. The control unit 41 operates by navigation notification at one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the notification target combination has been elected regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. However, by setting the second internal winning command so that the operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the sub-control unit 91 side responds to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. An operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not specified.

Further, in this embodiment, push order replays (RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6) and push order bells (push order) are used as notification target roles in which the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification. Including bells 1 to 6), the main control unit 41 determines whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination in the internal winning command setting process. Since the second internal winning command is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that it can be specified, the sub control unit 91 notifies when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. It is possible to specify whether the target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell, and the sub-control unit 91 can also perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target combination.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is controlled by the AT, and when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. Since the push order command setting process for setting the push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the player can use the sub control unit 91 side in the state where the navigation notification is executed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the notification target roles for the main control unit 41 to execute the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. When the internal lottery result is a push order replay and when the push order bell is set, that is, when the navigation notification is executed, the notification target roles won in the internal lottery are different types. However, when the stop order that is advantageous to the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is set, so that the types of push order commands can be reduced. can.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. While setting a push order command including a possible navigation number, in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first stop on the left) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the notification target regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, the process of setting the push order command including the navigation number can be standardized.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, which is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed. For example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the first is determined. By performing the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the bell can be won, and when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, whether the RT2 transition re-game can be won by performing the first stop operation. Whether or not it is confirmed, and when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the normal re-game can be won, and the main control unit 41 In the push order command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop, After the second stop operation is performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. While preventing the player from being identified as a stop order that is advantageous to the player even if fraud is applied, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, the sub-control unit 91 operates in the stop order that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to produce according to whether or not it has been done.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. When it is determined that the winning combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, the command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the winning combination to be stopped is determined is different from the push order command. It may also be a command. For example, by transmitting another command including the winning number of the notification target combination won in the internal lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined based on the type of the notification target combination won. The configuration may be such that it can be specified, or it may be configured to provide a separate command including a navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order is advantageous to the player. By configuring the process to set a command that can specify the above, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. After the combination to be stopped is determined, each time the push order command setting process is performed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be a configuration that is transmitted at least once when the stopping combination is determined. After sending the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the person, the push order command setting process may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs push order command setting processing when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed in the state of performing the navigation notification. However, in the case where the navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed according to the internal winning command, and the winning status of the special role is displayed as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of a general combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It is a configuration, and the winning number when the notification target combination is won as the internal winning result is within a predetermined numerical range (push order replay (RT2 transition replays 1 to 6, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6) as the notification target combination). The winning numbers are 2 to 14, and consecutive numerical values consisting of the pushing order bells (the winning numbers of the pushing order bells 1 to 6 are 22 to 27) are assigned, and in the internal winning command setting process. , When the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range (2 to 14, 22 to 27) in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed while being controlled by the AT, the notification target combination A second internal winning command that can be specified but the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified is set, and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the main Regardless of whether or not the control unit 41 controls the AT, the sub-control unit 91 does not specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. Even if the side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlled.

Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 uses the internal lottery result as the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, the second internal winning command is transmitted. The processing when doing so can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the notification target roles for which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, That is, the internal lottery result is assigned consecutive numerical values in the first numerical range (2 to 14) as the winning numbers of the winning combinations of the RT2 transition regames 1 to 6 and the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, and the internal lottery is performed. The winning number when the result becomes the push order bell, that is, the winning number of each lottery target combination of the push order bells 1 to 6 as the internal lottery result, is assigned a continuous numerical value in the second numerical range (22 to 27). Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery according to whether the winning number is in the first numerical range or the second numerical range. Since it can be determined whether the result is a push order replay or a push order bell, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control a plurality of gaming states including a first state (RT1) and a second state (RT2, RT3), and in each gaming state, it is internal. The types of push order replays as notification target roles determined in the lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT1, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are lottery target combinations, while RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 is not a lottery target combination, and in RT2 and 3, RT1 transition regames 1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while RT2 transition regames 1 to 6 are not lottery target roles, and the game states RT1 and RT2, The type of notification target combination that is the target of internal winning is different from that of 3), and the winning number and the game state when the internal lottery result is a push order replay in the first state of the game state are the first. Since the winning numbers when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in the second state are all assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 14), the first state in the internal winning command setting process. In both the second state and the second state, the process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay can be standardized.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a combination other than the notification target combination or a loss in the state of not being controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28 in this embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target combination, the first When one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 14) is included and the internal lottery result is the push order bell which is the notification target combination, the second numerical range (22 to 27) is included. By setting a second internal winning command including one winning number (22 in this embodiment) included in), the internal lottery result is the notification target combination in a state where the AT is not controlled. Even if the winning combination is other than the notification target combination, the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted. Therefore, regardless of whether the internal lottery result is the notification target combination or not. The process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be standardized.

In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the notification target combination when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the player has won, a second internal winning command related to the general role is set so that the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified. , When the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the second internal winning related to the general role can be specified so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. While setting the command, when the AT is in control, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number according to the type of the notification target combination won, for example, as a push order replay. When the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won, the winning number "8" is set, and when the pushing order bell 6 is won as the pushing order bell, a second internal winning command including the winning number "27" is set to set the AT. When it is in the controlled state, a second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the winning notification target combination may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, so that the sub On the control unit 91 side, the stop order that is advantageous for the player can be notified by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, so that the lottery target winning combination internally won. An effect according to the type of winning combination included in, for example, an effect suggesting the possibility that the normal re-game included in the RT1 transition re-game 1 will be won when the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won. Can be done.

Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and not to transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by such a configuration. In the state, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, and the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified on the sub-control unit 91 side. It can be notified by the navigation effect, and the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

The winning number of the push order replay and the winning number of the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range and the push order in which the winning number of the push order replay is set are set. The configuration may be such that the second numerical range in which the winning number of the bell is set is continuous. Even with such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not it is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the user, it is possible to simplify the process of transmitting the second internal winning command.

Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 28 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general winning combination, and the winning numbers of the push order replay which is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 14). , The winning number of the push order bell which is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (22 to 27), and the winning number of the non-notifying target combination is the first numerical range and the second numerical range. Although the configuration is distributed and set in the numerical range before and after the above, the winning numbers of all the non-notifying target combinations may be continuously set in the third numerical range. With such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination by the winning number used when performing the predetermined control. Since it can be determined by whether or not it is possible, the process when transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified, and it is determined whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-notifying target combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The process to be performed can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 has the same type of notification target combination group (in this embodiment, the push order replay group and the push order bell) regardless of the game state. The same transmission winning number (in this embodiment, "2" for the push order replay group and "22" for the push order bell group) is uniformly set for each group), and the transmission is performed. The configuration is such that a second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but in the internal winning command setting process, at least the group of the notification target role for which the same transmission winning number is set is set. , Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. It suffices to prevent this, and the groups of the same type of notification target roles that are subject to lottery in one game state are divided into multiple groups so that each group includes one role that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, a different transmission winning number may be set for each divided group. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control unit 91 side to specify whether the notification target combination belonging to any of the plurality of groups has been elected, and to execute the effect according to the specified group.

Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of this embodiment is rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided corresponding to each. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are composed of a hybrid stepping motor that makes one revolution in a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are based on a phase signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on control by the main control unit 41. , The exciting state of each exciting phase (4 phases of φ1 to φ4 in this embodiment) in the stepping motor is switched between exciting and non-exciting in a predetermined order to rotate.

The main control unit 41 rotates each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, setting 0 as the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R provided on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. To control. Further, in the above-mentioned main process, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined mode is set, and in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (main), it is specified based on the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position. A control signal indicating the excitation state of each excitation phase of the stepping motor is output to the motor drive circuit 45, and the motor drive circuit 45 outputs a phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. Is output to. As a result, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the exciting state of the exciting phase of the reel motor is switched from the phase signal and controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and each reel 2L, 2C corresponding to the reel motor 2R controls the rotation.

The excitation pattern of the reel motor set by the main control unit 41 by the main processing is not directly related to the game progress status and the game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the progress status of the game. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Among the excitation patterns of the reel motor, the game excitation pattern group includes a start pattern for starting the rotation of the reel in the stopped state and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state, and a predetermined constant speed state. A constant speed pattern for continuing to rotate the reel accelerated to the constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating in the predetermined constant speed state in a predetermined number of steps are included.

In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation, non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel, and the excitation and non-excitation of the excitation state of the reel motor are stepped. By switching to the excitation state defined in the order of numbers, the rotation of the reel can be controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and the main control unit 41 is a reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern of, by switching the excitation pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is possible to start the rotation of the reel in the stopped state and perform start control to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. By repeatedly setting the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, it is possible to perform constant speed rotation control to maintain the rotation of the reel at the constant speed rotation, and for the reel on which the stop switch is operated, By switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to a stop pattern at a predetermined timing, it is possible to perform rotation stop control for stopping the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing at which the stop switch is operated.

Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated according to the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized every time the reel reference position is detected, so that each reel 2L, 2C, A step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R is provided, and the value of the step number counter for the rotating reel is the predetermined number of steps (at least one reel makes one revolution). The number of steps is set to be larger than the 336 steps required for the above, and when the number of steps is 400 steps or more, for example, the main control unit 41 determines that a rotation abnormality has occurred in the reel, and the relevant reel has a rotation abnormality. It is possible to reset the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern, change the exciting state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern, and restart the rotation of the reel.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, the main control unit 41 sets a start pattern as an excitation pattern for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R as the game start operation is performed. , The rotation of each reel is started by changing the exciting state of each exciting phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the starting pattern. Further, when setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized and the counting of the number of steps is started. Then, by switching the excitation pattern from the starting pattern to the constant speed pattern, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by making at least one revolution of the reel before the step number counter reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the activation pattern of the reel motor is switched to the constant speed pattern, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the activation condition for activating the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reels is set. Judge that it was established. With the establishment of this activation condition, the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in this state to correspond to the corresponding reel. The stop operation of the above is effectively accepted, and the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel is started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, after the main control unit 41 starts the rotation of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32 in the stopped state, the reel reference position is set for at least one of the reels. When the number of steps counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position is required for the reel to make one revolution. If the number of steps exceeds the number of steps, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set to the starting pattern again for the reel. The excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the beginning of the starting pattern to restart the rotation. Further, when the restart control is performed, the step number counter is initialized. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 Activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The reel rotation control is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). Step) is exceeded, that is, when the number of steps since the previous reel reference position was detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 states that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel. Judging, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels. Then, for the reel for which the reel reference position is not detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited again from the beginning of the starting pattern. By changing the state, the rotation of the reel is restarted. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps after the change of the excitation state of the reel motor is started again by the starting pattern. It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The reel rotation control is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). If the number exceeds step), the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and the reel reference position is not detected. The step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed. Then, when the reel for which the restart control is performed does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. After that, even though the restart control is performed for the reel up to three times in succession, if the reel reference position is not detected before the step count counter reaches the predetermined number of steps, the reel reference position is not detected. All the reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control that controls the error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a backup storage area capable of holding the stored contents by being supplied with electric power by the backup power supply, and the power failure is generated based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48. When it is detected, the control state of the main control unit 41 is stored in the backup storage area, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state at the time when the power failure is detected is restored. Can be done. Then, when at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the reception of the stop operation is enabled for the reel and a power failure is detected, the control state of each reel is set. Data including the rotation state, the excitation pattern of each reel motor, etc. are stored in the backup storage area.

Then, when the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the power failure is detected based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For reels that were in a rotating state at that time, the excitation pattern at the time when power failure is detected is set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, while for each reel, the enabled state or disabled state of accepting the stop operation is electric. Regardless of the state before the disconnection, it returns as an invalid state. After that, various controls will be performed based on the control state reset at the time of return.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22A, the main control unit 41 controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and the electric power is generated in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, a constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, but the device returns in a state in which acceptance of the stop operation is invalid. After that, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. As a result, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) for the rotating reel, so that the reel of the reel is rotated normally. The condition for validating the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied. Then, when the condition for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied for all the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for all the rotating reels. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in this state, the stop operation is effectively accepted and the stop control of the corresponding reel is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22B, the rotation control of the reel was started according to the constant speed pattern set at the time of recovery from the power failure, but the torque of the reel motor was insufficient and the reel did not rotate normally. In that case, the step number counter exceeds the predetermined number of steps without detecting the reel reference position for the reel. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotational state of the reel, and for the reel, the step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern. Is set again to, and the reel rotation is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern. After that, by performing the restart control, the reel is rotated normally, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern for all the rotating reels, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the stop operation is performed. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the rotating reels is enabled. On the other hand, if the reels are not rotated normally and the reels are not rotated normally even though the restart control is performed up to 3 times in succession, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. Starts error control to control the state and disables the progress of the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position for the other reels when the step number counter for any of the reels exceeds a predetermined number of steps while the plurality of reels are rotating. Regardless of whether or not the number of steps counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the reels are sequentially restarted from the reels. For example, the reels rotate at different timings for a plurality of reels. Even if an abnormality occurs in the state, the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined first are restarted in sequence without waiting for the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined to be restarted. The return timing is set so that the timing for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 as a navigation notification is earlier than the timing for restarting the reels.

After starting the rotation of the reels, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation for all the rotating reels, and when the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied. , While enabling the acceptance of stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for all rotating reels, the reel reference position is detected for at least one of the reels after the reel rotation is started. If the number of steps since the start of rotation specified based on the number of steps counter or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds the predetermined number of steps exceeding one lap of the reel without being performed, the reel It is now judged that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of.

In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation state of the reel even once, it is determined that the rotation of the reel is abnormal, and if the error state is controlled to disable the progress of the game, the reel is temporarily disabled. Even in a situation where the reel can be rotated normally after the rotation of the reel is delayed, the progress of the game is disabled, which hinders the smooth progress of the game. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels is started, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels and the rotation is shifted to the constant speed rotation, and the activation condition of the stop operation is set. In the established situation, when a reel rotation abnormality is determined, restart control is performed to restart the reel by changing the exciting state of the reel motor again according to the starting pattern which is the exciting pattern at the time of reel starting. Every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, since the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated during the period from when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal until the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied after the restart control is performed, the reel is not rotated normally. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power supply is restarted and the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped due to the power interruption in the state where the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied, the control state before the power failure is obtained. The control to change the excitation state of the reel motor will be restarted from, but after that, if the normal rotation is specified by detecting the reel reference position, the acceptance of the stop operation will be enabled from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, if the normal rotation of the rotating reel is maintained, the power supply can be restarted and the game can be advanced immediately.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied, the torque for rotating the reel is insufficient and the reel is not rotated, resulting in a rotation abnormality. Even if it is determined, the restart control is performed for the reel, and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in such a case, from the time when the power supply is restarted, after the reel rotation abnormality is determined and the restart control is performed, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels, and the reel reference position is detected. In the period until the activation condition is satisfied by shifting to constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated, so after the power supply is restarted, the reel is in a situation where it is unknown whether the reel is in normal rotation. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the reel from stopping in an unstable state.

Further, in this embodiment, when the reel reference position is detected and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, it is determined that the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied, and the reel has a constant speed. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the rotating reel from being executed by the stop operation even though the rotation has not been reached.

Further, in this embodiment, after the restart control for changing the excitation state of the reel motor according to the excitation pattern at the time of starting, the restart control is performed when the reel reference position is not detected and the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied. Is repeatedly executed, and if the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even if the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the error state is controlled and the game is disabled. , If the reel does not rotate normally even by the restart control, that is, if the problem cannot be solved by the restart control, the game can be disabled.

Further, in this embodiment, when a rotation abnormality is determined in a plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the restart control is sequentially performed from the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined. Even if rotation abnormalities are determined at different timings on a plurality of reels, each reel can be set to normal rotation at the earliest possible stage.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines a rotation abnormality in a plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the reels for which the rotation abnormality is determined are sequentially re-started. The configuration is such that start control is performed. For example, when a rotation abnormality of any of the reels is determined, the operation is repeated until a period (a period for a predetermined number of steps) in which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reels can be determined elapses. A configuration that delays the start control, that is, when a rotation abnormality is determined at different timings on a plurality of reels while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest is performed. It may be configured to delay until the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined to be the latest, and with such a configuration, even if the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels, the rotation abnormality will occur. Since a plurality of determined reels can be restarted at the same timing, the appearance at the time of restart is improved.

Further, in this embodiment, when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one reel lap without detecting the reel reference position. , The configuration is such that the rotation abnormality of the reel is specified, but the predetermined number of steps is a value larger than the number of steps required for the reel to make one revolution, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. The value may be larger than the number of steps required to be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, control is performed to restart the reel when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number without detecting the reel reference position. If the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even after performing a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal and the game is disabled, but the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied. If the reel is not restarted at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after the start of rotation, and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by shifting to the constant speed rotation, but at least the reel reference position is detected. Any configuration may be used as long as the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by.

Further, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to the constant speed depending on whether the number of steps from the start of the reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps required to shift to the constant speed rotation. However, by determining whether or not a constant speed is satisfied based on the number of steps or time until the reel reference position is detected and the next reel reference position is detected, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to a constant speed rotation. It may be configured to judge.

Next, the control related to the navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 36.

As shown in FIG. 23, the game auxiliary display 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and each segment can be turned on in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, thereby driving the predetermined lighting mode. It is designed to be controlled to the lighting state or the extinguishing state in. As the game auxiliary display 12, a display, a liquid crystal display, or the like capable of lighting each segment in any one color such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, and blue, or a plurality of colors is provided. You may use it.

The main control unit 41 can display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and perform the navigation notification by setting the navigation notification display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. .. Further, by setting the payout number display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to notify the payout number of medals to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 due to the occurrence of a prize. By setting the error display data as the lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform error notification for displaying the error code indicating the content of the error on the game auxiliary display 12.

In the predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, a number, a lighting mode data for displaying a predetermined alphabet individually on one display constituting the game auxiliary display 12, and a predetermined symbol together with the number (this implementation). In the example, the lighting mode data for displaying ".") Is stored in the lighting mode data table defined for each content to be displayed. Further, in the lighting mode data table, a number is assigned in advance for each lighting mode data, and one number is set so as to correspond to one lighting mode data. Then, when the main control unit 41 sets the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 puts the corresponding display in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c provided corresponding to the displays 12L and 12R. By setting the number corresponding to the display content to be displayed and executing the display data storage process, the display 12L and 12R are displayed with the predetermined content by the lighting mode data corresponding to the number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is possible. As a result, the number corresponding to the lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table can be specified in the case of performing the navigation notification, the notification of the number of payouts, and the case of the error notification. Using the common lighting mode data, it is possible to display a predetermined display content on each of the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary indicator 12.

Further, in the display data storage process, the number of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, the lighting mode data corresponding to the number is specified from the lighting mode data table, and the specified lighting mode data is used as the navigation notification display data and the number of payouts. The display data and error display data are stored in the output buffer of the display corresponding to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. As a result, each segment of the corresponding display is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the output buffer, so that a predetermined display content is displayed. In addition, the main control unit 41 has data for designating the lighting mode (lighting or extinguishing) of each segment of the display (8-bit data in which each bit indicates the lighting mode, for example, "00000001" ("1" is lit. By storing (data that only one segment corresponding to the rightmost bit) is stored in the output buffer of the corresponding display, the lighting mode data is displayed without executing the display data storage process. It is also possible to store the display directly in the output buffer of the device and display the display based on the lighting mode data, and even if the lighting mode is not set in the lighting mode data table, the indicators 12L and 12R It is possible to display it.

When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and one of the special combinations (BB1 to RB) is won. Whether or not the execution condition of the navigation notification of the predetermined special role (in this embodiment, it is established when a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is performed after the special role is won) is satisfied. If the determination is made and the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, a flag indicating that the navigation notification is performed when the special role navigation notification execution condition is satisfied is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , Performs the above-mentioned push order command setting process. The flag is referred to in the push order command setting process, and is after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, and the timing at which the winning special role can be won, that is, inside. When the result of the lottery is out of order, the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the symbols constituting the winning special combination are set as the transmission navigation numbers.

Then, after the push order command setting process is completed, the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary display 12 is set. In the setting process of the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary display 12, if the special combination is not won or the implementation condition is not satisfied, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-mentioned push order command transmission process. , Refer to the transmission navigation numbers (“0” to “9”) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification, and set the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special combination is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, it is set by the push order command transmission process, and a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification (in this embodiment, "blue 7"). Refer to the transmission navigation numbers ("10" to "13") that can identify "red 7", "white 7", and "BAR", and select the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number. And set it in the output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 24A, when the main control unit 41 sets the navigation notification display data, the navigation number is the standard pressing order number “0”, and when the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation notification display is displayed. By setting the initial value of the output buffer as data, that is, by initializing the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and setting all the first to eighth segments of each display 12L and 12R to the off state, the game assistance is provided. The display 12 is controlled to be hidden. In addition, the navigation number is any of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" other than the standard pressing order, and when the navigation notification is performed, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is lit so as to display the number of the navigation number. By setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer to turn on the 8th segment of the display 12R and turn off the other segments, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. To control. In addition, when the special role is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, if the navigation notification display data including the navigation number suggesting the design corresponding to the special role is selected, the number of the navigation number is selected. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on, the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the navigation number.

As a result, the segment that lights up in each stop order (left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) By different combinations of, the navigation number is displayed so that it can be identified from the combination of the lit segments, and as a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result is provided as a game assistance. The display 12 can be used for notification. In addition, if the special role has been won and the implementation conditions have been met, the navigation number suggests a pattern (blue 7, red 7, white 7, BAR) according to the winning special role. By displaying ("10" to "13") in a recognizable manner, a predetermined symbol is suggested as the timing of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and a special role can be won as a navigation notification. The timing of possible stop operations can be notified by using the game auxiliary display 12. Further, the main control unit 41 controls the 8th segment main of the display 12R to be lit together with the navigation number when performing the navigation notification, while the 8th segment main of the display 12R is turned off when the navigation notification is not performed. By controlling to, it is possible to recognize whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is lit so that the display mode of the game assistance display 12 is the navigation number. However, the game assistance display 12 is used as the navigation notification. The display mode may be a display mode that directly indicates the stop order (for example, modification 1 of FIG. 25), is not a display mode that directly recalls the stop order, and is a lit segment. It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order from the combination of the above, and the display mode may not be easily identified without a correspondence table or the like (for example, modification 2 of FIG. 25).

Specifically, as shown as a modification 1 in FIG. 25, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is "1", the reel number of the middle reel 2C is "2", and the reel number of the right reel 2R is "3". By displaying the reel number of the first stop on the display 12L of one of the two game auxiliary indicators 12 and displaying the reel number of the second stop on the other indicator 12R (game auxiliary indicator). By displaying, for example, "21" on 12, it is shown that the stop order is in the middle, left, and right), the stop order is directly suggested as a navigation notification, and the design of blue 7 is "b7", red. By displaying these "b7", "r7", "S7", and "br" on the game auxiliary display 12, the symbol of 7 is "r7", the symbol of white 7 is "S7", and the symbol of BAR is "br". , Blue 7, Red 7, White 7, and BAR can be suggested to directly suggest the stop timing.

Further, as shown as a modification 2 in FIG. 25, a display is used as a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments suggesting a stop order in the left, middle, and right). It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the 2nd segment of 12L, the 4th and 6th segment combinations of the display 12R, etc.) and turning on the corresponding segment, but the correspondence table etc. is used. The stop order can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified by the above.

When the game progresses and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not any of the winning combinations has been won, and pays out. If any of the accompanying wins (small wins) has been won, the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of the winning is set in the output buffer as the payout number display data, and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. Display the number of medals to be played.

As shown in FIG. 24B, when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so as to display the payout number of medals, and the eighth By setting the payout number display data that turns off the other segments including the segment in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be in the off state, so that the lighting mode in the navigation notification and the number of medals to be paid out are as described above. The lighting mode is different from the lighting mode in the notification of, so that it is not misunderstood whether the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. There is.

When an error is detected during the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a predetermined error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 26) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the type of the error. When the setting is made and the predetermined error display condition described later is satisfied (in this embodiment, when an error is detected during the rotation control of the reels, all the reels are stopped, and the rotation control of the reels is in progress. When an error is detected at a time other than the above, the error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

As shown in FIG. 26, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 so as to display the letters and numbers of the error code, and the other segments. By setting the error display data that turns off the light in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of the detected error. Then, when a predetermined error release condition (see FIG. 26) is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. In the error display data, by lighting the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display 12L, the character "E" is displayed, and the number corresponding to the error code number in the segment of the display 12R is displayed. While turning on the segment, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the error code on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the alphabetic character "E", which is not displayed in the navigation notification or the payout number display, is displayed on the display 12L. Therefore, the lighting mode when notifying the error code is different from the lighting mode in the navigation notification and the lighting mode in the notification of the number of payout medals, and is the error code notified by the game auxiliary display 12? , Navi notification, and the number of medals to be paid out are not misunderstood.

Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 according to the progress of the game or the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30.

As shown in FIG. 27A, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the game, and displays the game auxiliary display. All segments of the device 12 are turned off and controlled to be hidden. Then, when the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. At this time, the navigation number "0" in the standard pressing order is set with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the navigation notification is not performed, all the segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped after the operation of the third stop is performed, if any of the small winning combinations has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning. Is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from the time when the number of bets of 1 or more is set to the time when the payout of medals is started by winning. , From the time when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, one or more bets are set, or the waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed). That) is established and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as the payout number display over the period until the transition to the standby state is established. When the third stop operation is performed and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-game combination has won a prize or if neither prize has occurred, the game assistance is provided. By not setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the display 12, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is kept hidden, and one or more bets are set in order to start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from time to the time when the bet number is set to start the next game, that is, for the entire period in one game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification, the reel 2L related to the game is performed after the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set. When starting the rotation control of 2, 2C and 2R, one of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" is set as the transmission navigation number by the above-mentioned push order command transmission process with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If, or if the conditions for implementing the special role navigation notification are satisfied and any of the navigation numbers "10" to "13" is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is used. The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12. After that, the stop switch of the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to control the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. Then, it waits for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and if the small win has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning is determined. The number of medals to be paid out is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed for a period from the time when the rotation of the reel is started with the start of the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. It is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification. Then, when the output buffer is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be hidden, and then all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From the above, the number of medals is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display over the period from when one or more bets are set.

Further, as described above (see FIG. 20), the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. If it is determined that the rotating reel has an abnormality in the rotation state, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the rotation is restarted for the reel that is determined to have an abnormality. Perform restart control. After that, when all the rotating reels are rotated normally, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, when the navigation notification is performed, the navigation notification is sent to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. The display data is set, and then the output buffer is initialized when the stop switch of the third stop is released. As a result, when performing navigation notification, acceptance of the stop operation is effective in the period from the start of the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop is released. Regardless of whether it is disabled or disabled, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, the main control unit 41 transmits the above-mentioned push order command to the sub control unit 91 when the game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the navigation number, the sub control unit 91 is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, or a stop operation based on the navigation number is performed. By displaying an image suggesting timing (for example, an image of "red 7") in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, an advantageous operation mode is suggested.

In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when the push order command is received when performing the navigation effect, but the timing at which the navigation effect is started is the main. It may be before the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the control unit 41 side. For example, a reel acceleration information command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate with the start of the game is received. Even if the timing is within the period from the reception of the push order command to the time before the acceleration completion command is received, which indicates that the control to accelerate the reel to the predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game. good. In particular, when the stop operation is enabled, the navigation notification is started on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect is started on the sub control unit 91 side, so that the navigation notification is performed. Even in the state, during the period from the start operation to the activation of the stop operation, the navigation notification and the navigation effect do not suggest the winning of the notification target role, so that the internal information is provided during the period. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the winning role in the lottery. Further, in particular, the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is started and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side is started after the reel rotation related to the game is started, for example. , The main control unit 41 controls the game to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game in the period from the start operation to the start of the reel rotation control related to the game, and the reel effect using the reel in the freeze state. In the case of a configuration that can execute Since the winning of the winning combination is not suggested, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the winning combination in the internal lottery during the period.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released after starting the navigation notification, and issues a game end command to the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side ends based on the reception of the game end command. , The navigation effect may be configured to be performed at least when the result of the game changes depending on the stop order. For example, the stop switch is operated in a stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. If it is confirmed that the notification target combination will not win, or if it is confirmed that only one combination will win by performing the first stop operation or the second stop operation, etc., the main control unit 41 side The navigation effect may be terminated before the navigation notification is terminated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the result of the game is confirmed.

The RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can retain the stored contents by being supplied with power by the backup power supply even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power failure is detected based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48, the control state of the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started after that, the power supply is started in the control state when the power failure is detected. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the main control unit 41 rotates and controls at least one or more reels as the game progresses, and the game auxiliary display 12 is notified of the navigation, the power is cut off. When it is detected, the control related to the power interruption is performed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and the rotation is controlled. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel, the number of steps of excitation control, the navigation number, etc. can be restored with the contents when the power failure is detected. Perform power failure processing so that it can be done.

After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure, it is stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. The control state before the power failure is restored based on the control state, but the state of accepting the stop operation by all the stop switches among the control states is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state in which acceptance of the stop operation by all the stop switches is invalidated.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the control state to the state before the power failure, the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel and the number of steps are stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. Restore the contents as they were. Then, when it returns, the control state on the main control unit 41 side including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure and the push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the same control as at the start of the game is executed, and the control for advancing the game is performed based on the control state set in the RAM 41c, based on the navigation number set in the RAM 41c. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after controlling to restart the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the excitation pattern of the reel motor set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor of the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure is excited from the number of steps of the excitation pattern when the power failure is detected, and the corresponding reel is rotated at the predetermined constant speed again. It is controlled to rotate, and when the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, control is performed to enable acceptance of a stop operation by the stop switch of the corresponding reel.

At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set at the time when the power failure is detected. In such a case, as described above (see FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)), the corresponding reel is normally rotated depending on the state (rotated state or stopped state) of the corresponding reel. In some cases, it may not rotate normally, and if it does not rotate normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reel normally.

Then, when the reel is rotated normally or is not rotated normally and the reel is rotated normally by the restart control, and the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, the corresponding reel is used. Enables the acceptance of stop operations by the stop switch of. After that, it waits until the stop switch for which acceptance is enabled is operated, and when the stop switch is operated, it controls to stop the corresponding reel.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 receives the return command after recovering from the power failure, and then receives the push order command, so that the sub control unit 91 is based on the navigation number specified by the push order command. When it is specified that the navigation notification is performed on the 41 side, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player based on the navigation number is restarted. After that, the production is controlled based on various commands received according to the progress of the game. As a result, the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure, transmits a push order command, etc., then restarts the reel rotation control, and the corresponding reel rotates at a constant speed, so that the stop operation is performed by the stop switch. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 restarts the navigation effect when the push order command is received after returning from the power failure, so that the sub control unit 91 is the main control unit 41. When the stop operation is enabled on the side, it is possible to assume that the navigation effect has already been performed.

As described above, when the power failure is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and controls the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. During the period from the time when the above is detected until the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Further, when a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and when the main control unit 41 returns, a navigation notification is displayed on the output buffer. Since the data is controlled to be reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period from the time when the power supply is restarted to the time when the main control unit 41 is restored. It has become like.

Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and then resets the navigation notification display data. When a power failure is detected, the reel that was in rotation control is controlled to rotate again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and when the corresponding reel reaches a constant speed rotation, a stop operation by the stop switch of the reel is performed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, and then stops by the stop switch. The acceptance of operations is enabled, and the acceptance of stop operations is enabled while the navigation number is already displayed.

Further, when the main control unit 41 detects a power failure while controlling the rotation of the reel and then recovers from the power failure, the main control unit 41 executes the same process as at the start of the game and is set at the time of recovery. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls the game and a sub control unit 91 that controls the effect, and the main control unit 41 is controlled by the main control unit 41 side. The game auxiliary display 12 is configured to be capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

In such a configuration, if a power failure occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is performing the navigation notification, the navigation notification will be performed even after the power failure is restored. If the stop operation is enabled before the navigation notification is restored, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the advantageous operation mode to be notified.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after starting the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. In addition, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation notification is being performed, during the period from the restart of the power supply to the establishment of the predetermined activation condition. , The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, the navigation notification is restarted by the game auxiliary display 12, and the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the stop switch 8L, during the period from the restart of the power supply until the activation condition is satisfied, Since the stop operation by the 8C and 8R is not accepted, it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from being stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the normal rotation is performed after the power supply is restarted. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the timing is earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is restarted at, the stop switches 8L, 8C are mistakenly used in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without the player knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified by the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 to the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination, and the error that has occurred. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number capable of identifying an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using a display means for displaying a predetermined content. The predetermined contents and the navigation number can be displayed without providing any means.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed. Then, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, after restarting the navigation notification, the rotation of the reel that was controlling the rotation when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped is rotated. The control is restarted, and after the power supply is restarted, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped, regardless of the stopped state of the reel. Since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the resumption of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets a plurality of different operation timings (“blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” as a winning line as an advantageous operation mode for the player. An operation mode for operating at one of the operation timings (timing at which the LN is stopped) and an operation mode for operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders (for example, left middle right, left and right middle operation order, etc.) , The configuration is such that the navigation notification is used, but the operation mode and the like may be notified by a combination of these.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after starting the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode for the player. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the start of the game, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and then enables the predetermined activation. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted when the conditions are satisfied, but the navigation notification may be started after the start of the game until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. For example, the navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined effect may be obtained from the time when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The navigation notification may be started at any timing within the period until the conversion condition is satisfied. Even in such a configuration, after the start of the game, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, so that the player does not know that the advantageous operation mode is notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

After the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel, and determines again. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and after the navigation notification is started, even when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel, the navigation is performed. Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode is continued by the notification, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are erroneously operated in the operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit a push order command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91, whereas the sub control unit 91 has a push order. It is possible to execute a navigation effect that can specify an advantageous operation mode based on a command, and when a navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side, a liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91 side is used. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the advantageous operation mode is notified.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after the activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed, and then the power supply is restarted to perform the main control. When the unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, the navigation notification is restarted, the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and then the rotation control of the reel is started to enable a predetermined value. When the condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. Therefore, the push order command that can specify the advantageous operation mode at an earlier timing than the activation condition is satisfied is the sub-control unit 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the sub-control unit 91 starts the navigation effect before the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode has been notified.

In this embodiment, since the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the power failure is detected when the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure. It is configured to return to the control state before the power failure based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c at times. In particular, for the reel whose rotation control was performed before the power failure, the reel motor at the time of the power failure It is designed to recover with the excitation pattern and the number of steps set, and when recovering from the power failure, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps. After controlling to restart the rotation of the reel, if the reel does not rotate normally, the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel is reset to the starting pattern and the restart control is performed to restart the rotation. However, when the main control unit 41 is in a state where one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power failure and the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted, the control state before the power failure is restored. May be configured to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor as the starting pattern for the corresponding reel.

Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of the start pattern, the constant speed pattern, and the stop pattern when controlling the normal game. FIG. 29. As shown in (a), the starting pattern was selected on condition that the effective start switch 7 was operated, and the reel in the stopped state was started and accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, on standby in this state, a stop pattern is selected according to the number of sliding frames for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on the condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the stop switch is operated. The reel is stopped at the stop position according to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in this embodiment). After that, in the configuration in which the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started and keeps the reel in the stopped state, as shown in FIG. 29B, the starting pattern before the power failure When the reel is stopped during the start due to the power failure, the starting pattern selected at the time of the power failure is used when recovering from the power failure. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel can be started without temporarily causing the reel to rotate normally. It is possible to set the return timing so that the timing for displaying the navigation number as the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is earlier than the timing for restarting the reel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before the electric power failure, and when the reel is stopped in the middle of the constant speed rotation due to the electric power failure, the electric power is generated. When returning from disconnection, the reel rotates normally once by changing the excitation pattern from the constant speed pattern selected at the time of power interruption to the start pattern and changing the excitation state from the first step of the start pattern. It is possible to start the reel without making the state not to be done. After the reels are started, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the conditions for enabling the stop operation are satisfied, and the stop operation of all rotating reels is accepted. To enable.

If the activation flag indicating that the reel is rotating at a constant speed is set according to the low speed pattern, the activation flag is also cleared when the starting pattern is changed.

When the reel recovers from the power failure, the reel will not rotate normally, and if the condition for enabling the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied in this state, the reel will normally rotate when the stop operation is performed. It may not stop. However, by changing the excitation pattern from the constant speed pattern selected at the time of power failure to the starting pattern and rotating the reel normally, the reel stop control is executed in a situation where it is unknown whether the reel is rotating normally. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping in an unstable state.

It is possible to set the return timing so that the timing for displaying the navigation number as the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is earlier than the timing for restarting the reel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the rotation of the reel is controlled to be stopped by a stop pattern before the power interruption, and when the reel is stopped during the control to be stopped by the power interruption, the reel is stopped. When recovering from a power failure, the stop pattern selected at the time of the power failure is used, and the excitation state is changed from the number of steps at the time of the power failure in the stop pattern, so that the stop pattern executed at the time of the power failure can be changed. By continuously executing, the stop pattern that was executed at the time of power failure is executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in this embodiment) excluding the time during power failure after starting before power failure. Can be done.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can detect the occurrence of various errors related to the game such as an error related to medal payout, an error related to medal insertion, and an error related to reel rotation in the main process and the timer interrupt process (main). When a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The predetermined error display condition is when various errors are detected when the reels are not rotation-controlled due to the game, and various errors are detected when the reels are rotation-controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 30, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 at the start of the game as described above, performs the navigation notification, and then performs the navigation notification. 3 When a predetermined waiting period elapses from the time when the stop switch in which the stop operation is performed is released, the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning situation is used as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Is set to, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. In such a configuration, from the time when the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is released, and a predetermined standby is further performed. If various errors related to the game, especially errors related to inserting medals and errors related to reel rotation, are detected during the time limit until the period elapses, control related to the game is continued until the above time limit elapses. Control to set the error code indicating the content of the detected error in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as error display data and display the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the time limit elapses. After starting, control to the error state.

After that, when the release condition according to the type of the detected abnormality (for example, the operation of the reset switch 23 in the predetermined procedure) is satisfied, the control of the game is restarted from the time before the control of the error state is started. .. By resuming the control of the game, it is determined whether or not the control after the third stop operation is performed and the predetermined periodic period has elapsed, that is, whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and the small When a winning combination has occurred, the number of medals paid out by winning is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let me.

As described above, when various errors are detected in the state where the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and performs the navigation notification, By setting error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is completed and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed in the period from the start to the end of the navigation notification. Is designed to limit what is done.

A conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that controls the progress of a game and a sub control unit that controls the production. A game auxiliary display capable of displaying an error code indicating the content thereof is provided, and a command capable of identifying the internal lottery result can be transmitted to the sub control unit. According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like provided in the sub control unit to notify the player.

In such a configuration, an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified due to a defect in the sub control unit or the liquid crystal display, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 side is used. In addition to controlling the display of the advantageous operation mode in the above, the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player is used to display the advantageous operation mode. Assuming that the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous for the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid out to the player on one display and the player can use it. Since both of the advantageous operation modes are displayed, there is a risk that the displayed contents may be misunderstood when the display at that time is switched.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a predetermined content and an error code indicating the content when an error related to the game occurs. The display 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display 12 can display a navigation number capable of identifying an advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized to the hidden state. Since the predetermined content is displayed, when the navigation number is displayed on the display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, the game auxiliary display that displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content without providing a new display means. By displaying the navigation number using 12, both the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed, and when the predetermined content is displayed after the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12, the game assistance is displayed. Since the display content of the display 12 is once initialized to be hidden and then the predetermined content is displayed, it is misunderstood whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It can be prevented from being stowed.

When the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the main control unit 41 temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 and hides it. The configuration may be such that the predetermined content is displayed after the state of the above, and the period during which the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden may be at least a period during which the player or the like can recognize that the lights have been turned off. In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 provides a predetermined waiting period for waiting after initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined content When displaying the number of medals to be paid out, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden.

Further, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed during the predetermined waiting period. The mode may be a period during which the player or the like can recognize that the lights have been turned off at least while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts. For example, the timer interrupt process (main) is waited for at least once. By doing so, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched. Therefore, while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts, the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily turned on. It can be controlled to the off state. Further, for example, when the stop switch of the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, the timer is operated and the timer measures the passage of a predetermined standby time. By waiting for the waiting period, the game auxiliary display 12 may be temporarily controlled to be turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment outputs a buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the stop switch of the third stop is operated when the navigation notification is performed by the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer after initializing once, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be temporarily turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the payout number notification. However, while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts, by displaying a display not related to the game (for example, "-" or "_"), the display contents of the navigation notification and the notification of the number of payouts are displayed. It is possible to prevent the content from being mistaken for the content.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the number of medals paid out, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are temporarily initialized. When setting the payout number display data, by setting the data to display the total number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination, it is completed after the medal payout is started. The total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period until the medals are paid out. However, when the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. After setting the data to display 0 medals as, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated to the total number of paid medals, and the payout is made. The total number of completed medals may be sequentially displayed, and finally, the total number of medals paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination may be controlled to be displayed. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By initializing the contents once and setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, whether the display contents displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are navigation numbers or predetermined contents. Can be prevented from being misidentified.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, 0 sheets are shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. Then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data may be controlled to be updated so as to be added one by one. With such a configuration, the period from the start of payout of medals due to the winning of a small role until the payout of the first medal is detected, that is, the number of medals paid out is 0. For a certain period, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and then the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed from the time when the payout of the first medal is detected, and the total number of medals for which the payout is completed is displayed. When the numbers are sequentially displayed, that is, when the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content, the navigation number is displayed as the display content of the game assistance display 12. After the display, the number of medals to be paid out will be displayed once the display is hidden, and the same effect as the configuration of this embodiment will be obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 will be displayed. It is possible to prevent the navigation number or the predetermined content from being misidentified.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation notification is completed and the predetermined waiting period elapses, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data. Data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set, and then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is controlled to be updated so as to be added by 1. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the navigation notification to the elapse of the predetermined waiting time and the initial data of the payout number display data are set, and the payout sensor 34c is used to obtain the first medal. The display of the game assistance display 12 can be hidden during the period from the detection of the payout to the update of the payout number display data, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment is obtained, and the game assistance is achieved. It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the display 12 from being misidentified as whether it is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration in which the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be updated, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period elapses after the navigation notification display data is initialized, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The data may be set, and then the payout number display data may be updated so as to be added by 1 each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. With such a configuration, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, and the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. From the time when the initial data of the payout number display data is set to the period from when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated, the game auxiliary display 12 The display can be hidden, and the same effect as the configuration of this embodiment is obtained, and it is misidentified whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It is possible to prevent it from being done. It should be noted that these periods, that is, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of a predetermined waiting time, and the withdrawal. By applying only one of the periods from the time when the initial data of the number of medals display data is set until the payout of the first medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c and the number of medals to be paid out is updated. , After displaying the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be temporarily hidden and the number of medals paid out may be displayed, or any two of these periods may be set. It may be a configuration to be applied.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, "1" to "9" can be displayed as the display mode of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation A part of the display mode (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") In the notification is included in the display mode of the number of payouts. However, when the two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, the display mode is different. For example, in the navigation notification, the eighth segment of the indicator 12R and the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation number are used. In the payout number display, only the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on, so that the display contents of the navigation notification are displayed. It is possible to prevent the display content of the notification of the number of payouts from being misunderstood.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed after the start of the game, until the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Since the game auxiliary display 12 continuously displays the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player over the period of the game, the period from the start to the end of the game. It is possible to continuously make the player recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game, and starts the third stop operation at the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the stop switch is released. However, as the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as the game progresses. The navigation number is continued to the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until the operation of 1 becomes effective to one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as the end of the game. When the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are set at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game. When starting the rotation control, the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, for example, from the start timing of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the operation is enabled, as the end of the game. When, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or ended due to winning, or when the bet number setting operation is performed for the next game. The navigation number may be continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the end timing of the game.

Among such configurations, in particular, one start timing is controlled to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set. By setting any of the above, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R become effective. Further, one start timing is set to either when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed is started, or when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. For example, in the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect of rotating the reel in a mode different from that of a normal game is performed. Even if the configuration is such that the game is performed or the game is controlled to a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined time, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the reel effect, the freeze state, or the like ends. It is possible to limit the display of the navigation number during the period when the reel effect is performed. Further, by setting one start timing to be when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs in the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, for example, Regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned reel effect or reel acceleration due to recovery from power failure occurs, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at a predetermined timing at the start of the game. be able to.

Further, in particular, by setting the end timing of one to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, all reels 2L, 2C, from the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, thereafter. Since the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 can be hidden during the period from when 2R is stopped until the winning judgment is made, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out in connection with winning, the navigation system is used. It is possible to prevent the number and the number of payouts from being mistaken for each other.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is information about the result of the game as a predetermined content, and is used on the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player due to the occurrence of a prize at the end of the game. , The navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player is displayed as the display content different from the predetermined content, and the stop switch that is advantageous for the player. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the number of payouts as a predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, so that the display period of the navigation number and the display period of the number of payouts overlap on the game auxiliary display 12. You don't have to.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment displays on the game auxiliary display 12 a navigation number capable of specifying a stop mode that is advantageous for the player and the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination. Since the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out do not include a common mode, it is determined whether the navigation number is displayed or not. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the number of payouts is displayed as the content.

The display mode of the navigation number to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out are when the two displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 are integrated. The configuration may be any configuration that does not include a common mode, and for example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a configuration including a part of the display mode of the number of payouts and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 pays out a part of the display modes (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") Of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification. (For example, "8" when paying out 8 medals) is included in the display mode for notifying the number of medals to be paid out (for example, "8" when paying out 8 medals). It may be a configuration that does not include. With such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are notified. It is possible to prevent the display mode from being mistaken for.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 lights the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode of notifying the number of medals to be paid out. By turning off the 8th segment of the display 12, the display mode of one of the two displays 12L and 12R is used to notify the display mode of the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. Although it is a configuration that can identify whether it is a display mode, when the display modes of at least two indicators 12L and 12R are viewed as a unit, the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out can be identified. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, for example, when the navigation number "8" is notified in the navigation notification, "8" is displayed on the display 12L and "-" is displayed on the display 12R to display "-8" as an integrated display. On the other hand, in the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, "" (no display) is displayed on the display 12L and "8" is displayed on the display 12R so that "8" is displayed as an integrated display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out from being mistakenly recognized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power is cut off. Is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption when the operation of the control unit 41 or the like becomes unstable.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a power failure is detected while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number. The display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. However, the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be hidden when a power failure is detected, for example, in an output buffer. The game auxiliary display 12 is hidden by clearing the output port that outputs a control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the set data. By limiting the output of the drive signal output from the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. It may be a configuration or the like. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption.

In the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, the reels are controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation as the game progresses, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used for the game. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode is displayed, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted to the state before the power failure. When returning, after redisplaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure becomes constant speed rotation, the operation reception of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling to enable it, when recovering from a power failure, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted before the operation reception of the stop switch becomes effective, so the navigation number is erroneously displayed. It is possible to prevent the stop switch from being operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode suggested by the above.

When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment returns the control state to the state before the power failure, the main control unit 41 returns the state of the stop switch operation reception and the reel excitation pattern to the state before the power failure. When the control unit 41 returns, the operation reception of the stop switch is enabled, and the rotation control of the reel is started with the excitation pattern before the power failure. Rotation control is started by the excitation pattern, that is, the constant speed pattern for rotating at a constant speed rotation, but in order to start the rotation of the stopped reel, the torque is insufficient and the rotation is not started. After starting the rotation control of the reel, a predetermined period (a period longer than the time required for the reel sensor to detect the reference position when the reel is rotated) elapses without the reference position being detected by the reel sensor. When this happens, it is determined that the reel rotation error is detected, the operation reception of the stop switch is invalidated, the excitation pattern is changed from the stopped state to the starting pattern for accelerating, and the reel rotation control is started again. Can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Then, the operation reception of the stop switch, which is invalidated due to the determination of the reel rotation error, can be re-enabled when the reel accelerates to a predetermined constant speed rotation. In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display data is reset in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is resumed, after the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, the reception of the stop operation by the stop switch can be enabled, and the player can enable the game. When the stop operation can be performed by the stop switch, the navigation number can be reliably displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once enabled and then disabled, and then the reel rotation control is performed again. When the reel rotates at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is displayed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 can be continuously displayed even during the period from the return of the main control unit 41 to the re-activation of the stop operation by the top switch. When the player can perform the stop operation by the stop switch, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification.

In the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set, and after the game is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are all operated. The predetermined contents are in the state before the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the above are stopped and the game is ended, and the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode for the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When an error that causes the error code to be displayed is detected, when the game ends, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 so that the error is detected during the game. Therefore, since it is restricted from displaying the error code as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period until the game ends, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether the game is an error code or an error code as a predetermined content.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays an error code as a predetermined content other than the navigation number while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode for the player on the game auxiliary display 12. When the condition to be used is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 does not display the predetermined content until the end of the game, but the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number other than the navigation number. It suffices if the display content is not displayed, and even if the display content other than the error code is applied as the predetermined content, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether or not.

In this embodiment, when the navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 continues the navigation notification even when the reel stop operation is invalidated (hereinafter, also referred to as an invalid period). If the navigation notification is interrupted during the invalid period, the player may mistakenly recognize the push order. Therefore, there is a possibility that a stop operation based on an incorrect pressing order may be performed. However, in this embodiment, since the navigation notification is continuously performed even when the reel stop operation is invalidated, the push order can be recognized even when the stop operation is invalidated. As a result, erroneous operation by the player can be prevented, and convenience can be improved.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, when performing navigation notification, the main control unit 41 operates the start switch 7 after setting the bet number, and controls the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game. When the game auxiliary display 12 is started, the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as described above, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, when it is detected that the reel is rotating normally, the condition for enabling the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the acceptance of the reel stop operation is enabled. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is earlier than the timing when the activation condition is satisfied.

When the acceptance of the reel stop operation is disabled, the left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are turned off for the disabled stop switch, and the left for the enabled stop switch. , Middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R are controlled to light up. As a result, a notification that can identify that the acceptance of the reel stop operation is invalid (also a notification that can identify that the acceptance of the reel stop operation is enabled) is performed.

When the first stop operation is performed after the activation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 constants the second stop operation (that is, the operation of the remaining two stop switches) when the stop switch of the first stop is released. Invalidate the period. As a result, the second stop operation is performed before the first stop reel related to the first stop operation is stopped, and the number of sliding frames of the second stop reel related to the second stop operation is smaller than that of the first stop reel. For this reason, it is prevented that the second stop reel stops at an earlier timing than the first stop reel. Here, even when the second stop operation is disabled, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.

Further, although the second stop operation can be accepted, operations other than the second stop operation (stop switch, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, settlement switch 10 that performed the first stop operation) are performed. When it is detected, the acceptance of the second stop operation is invalidated. Then, when an operation other than the second stop operation is no longer detected, the acceptance of the second stop operation is re-enabled. Then, even when the acceptance of the second stop operation is invalidated, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.

Similarly, when the first stop operation and the third stop operation are ready to be accepted, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated when an operation other than these stop operations is detected. .. Then, when an operation other than the stop operation is no longer detected, the acceptance of the second stop operation is re-enabled. Then, even when the acceptance of the first stop operation or the third stop operation is invalidated, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.

Further, as described above (see FIG. 20), the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotating state of the rotating reel (for example, the reels 2C and 2R are rotating at a constant speed even though the reel 2L is not rotating, and the reels 2C and 2R are rotating. When the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for all reels), the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the restart control is performed to restart the rotation of the reels judged to have an abnormality. After that, when all the rotating reels are rotated normally, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. Then, even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.

Then, when the second stop operation is performed, the main control unit 41 performs the third stop operation (that is, the rest) when the stop switch for the second stop is released, as in the case where the first stop operation is performed. (Operation of one stop switch) is invalidated for a certain period of time. Here, even during the period in which the third stop operation is disabled, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.

After that, the stop switch of the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to control the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. Then, it waits for a predetermined waiting period. As described above, when performing navigation notification, the stop operation is accepted during the period from the start of the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop is released. Is enabled or disabled, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the main control unit 41 transmits the above-mentioned push order command to the sub control unit 91 when the game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the navigation number, the sub control unit 91 is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, or a stop operation based on the navigation number is performed. By displaying an image suggesting timing (for example, an image of "red 7") in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, an advantageous operation mode is suggested.

Then, in this embodiment, the reel stop operation may be invalidated during the game, but the stop switch for the third stop is released from the time when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. In the period up to that time, the sub-control unit 91 continuously executes the navigation effect regardless of whether the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled or disabled.

As described above, according to the example described with reference to FIG. 31, when an operation other than the stop operation corresponding to the reel is detected during the rotation of the specific reel, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated. Enables acceptance of the stop operation when no other operation is detected. Then, even when the acceptance of the stop operation is disabled, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.
Therefore, the push order can be recognized even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated.

If it is determined that the rotating reel has an abnormality in the rotation state, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all the reels, and the rotation is restarted for the reel that is determined to have an abnormality. Therefore, restart control is performed. After that, when all the rotating reels are rotated normally, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. Then, even when the acceptance of the stop operation is disabled, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.
Therefore, the push order can be recognized even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated.

Further, the timing for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is earlier than the timing when the activation condition is satisfied.
Therefore, the push order can be recognized even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated.

In addition, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R provide notification that the acceptance of the reel stop operation is invalidated.
Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the stop operation is accepted or that the stop operation is not accepted.

Further, the acceptance of the stop operation for the rotating reel is invalidated for a predetermined period after one stop operation is performed. Then, even when the acceptance of the stop operation is disabled, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification.
Therefore, the push order can be recognized even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated.

In addition, the reel stop operation may be invalidated during the game, but the period from when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started to when the stop switch for the third stop is released. In the sub-control unit 91, the navigation effect is continuously executed regardless of whether the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled or disabled.
Therefore, the push order can be recognized even when the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated.

Next, the control related to the setting of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and as the first display content, the medal given by winning a small winning combination. It is possible to display the number of payouts, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the main control unit 41, the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout number is displayed as the first display content during the period. When an error is detected in, then when the error display condition is satisfied as a predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer is controlled. The save process for saving the data to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by initializing the output buffer once, after controlling the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden, error display data is set in the output buffer as data for displaying the special display contents. While controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to display an error code as a special display content, it controls the error state and stands by.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the reset process for returning the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer is performed. By returning the payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number as the first display content. ..

In this way, after detecting the error, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the error display condition is satisfied, so that the error is detected. During the period from when the error display condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is restricted from being changed, and when the period elapses, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. You can do it.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects an error when the game is started and at least one reel is rotationally controlled, all the reels are stopped and all the reels are stopped. The configuration is such that the error is notified when the game ends by stopping the reel, but if an error is detected when the game is started and the rotation of the reel is controlled, an error is detected. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 detects the error when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number as the navigation notification. , The game auxiliary display 12 may display an error code indicating the content of the error.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals to be paid out as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 (8 in this embodiment). By setting the data to display, if an error is detected during the period when the total number of medals to be paid out to the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed as the first display content, then the error display condition is changed. When the configuration is established, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched so as to display an error code indicating the content of the detected error as the special display content (see FIG. 26). After setting the initial data of the payout number display data when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be updated. In such a configuration, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated and the data is small. While controlling the payout of a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a winning combination, for example, a payout error (E1) is detected due to a shortage of medals in the hopper unit 34, and the error display condition is satisfied. In this case, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is saved in the save area. After that, by initializing the output buffer once, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, the error display data indicating the payout error is set in the output buffer, and the error code is displayed. Then, when the return condition is satisfied, as the payout number display data, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is displayed on the game auxiliary display. By returning to the output buffer of 12, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the display content when an error is detected.

As shown in FIG. 32B, in the main control unit 41, the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed as the second display content during the period. When an error is detected in, after that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error state is controlled, and the same save process as when switching the above-mentioned first display content to the special display content is performed. , The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and while displaying an error code as a special display content, it waits in an error state, and when the recovery condition is satisfied, it is saved in the above-mentioned RAM 41c. By performing the same return processing as when returning the data of the first display content to the output buffer, the navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed before the error is detected. A similar navigation number can be displayed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment regardless of whether the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 or the navigation notification display data is set. By performing the common evacuation process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data can be evacuated to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is also saved. Is also returned to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, it is possible to return the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer. ing.

As in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which both the number of medals to be paid out to the player and the advantageous operation mode for the player are displayed on one display, a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. There is a possibility that the processing and the display processing for displaying the advantageous operation mode interfere with each other, and an unintended display is performed on the game auxiliary display.

On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the display contents based on the predetermined data by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer. The main control unit 41 sets the payout number display data as predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and pays out the medal given by winning a small winning combination as the first display content. It is possible to display the number of sheets, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs, and the game auxiliary display 12 has a configuration in which the error code is displayed. When the error display condition is satisfied as the condition for displaying the special display content while the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the display content of 1, the save process is executed and the number of payout number set in the output buffer is displayed. After saving the data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, by setting the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the error state is changed. When the return condition is satisfied by being released, the return process is executed and the payout number display data saved in the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, so that the first display is displayed again on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to display the number of medals to be paid out as the content, and an error occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content. When the display condition is satisfied, by executing the above-mentioned save process, the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then the error code is displayed as a special display content. By setting the error display data of the above in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the recovery condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above recovery process is executed. By returning the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the navigation number again as the second display content. When the condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied during the display of the first display content or the second display content, the data or the second table for displaying the first display content set in the output buffer. The data to be saved is saved, the special display contents are displayed by setting the special display contents in the output buffer, and the data for displaying the saved first display contents or the second display contents when the return condition is satisfied. Since the data for displaying the display contents of the above is returned to the output buffer and the first display contents or the second display contents are displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

Further, by executing the common save process, the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to evacuate, the capacity of the evacuation process for evacuating these display contents can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes a common evacuation process when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even when the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The hidden data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a configuration, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the hidden data may be saved. Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be standardized, the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment restores the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing the common return process, and is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to return the navigation notification display data to the output buffer, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the return processing for returning these display contents.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, but the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed. Regardless of the displayed content, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized when a power failure is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When switching the contents, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set, so that the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 can be switched to the display contents based on the new data. However, when the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided so as to be switchable and the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output buffer is set. While the display content based on the data set in the output buffer of is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the second output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer is displayed. As a configuration in which the display contents based on the data set in the output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is configured by switching the output buffer between the first output buffer and the second output buffer. The display contents of the above may be switched.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in a configuration in which a first output buffer and a second output buffer are provided as output buffers of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the game auxiliary display. Occurs when an error is detected when the number of payouts is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the payout number display data in the first output buffer set as the output buffer of the device 12. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error is set in the second output buffer, the payout number display data set in the first output buffer is retained as it is. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is changed to the game auxiliary display 12 by controlling the error state and switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the first output buffer to the second output buffer. While controlling to display the error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer of 2, the error state is controlled and the device waits.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of payouts based on the payout number display data held in the first output buffer. Further, when the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the fact that the error state is cleared.

Further, although not shown, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is set as the first output buffer, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the error is detected, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 can be switched to the second output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can display the error code, and then the error code can be displayed. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the navigation number.

With such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first display content is the number of medals to be paid out by winning a small winning combination, and the second display content is an advantageous stop operation for the player. It is possible to display a navigation number suggesting an aspect and an error code indicating the content when an error occurs as a special display content on the common game auxiliary display 12.

Further, when the main control unit 41 detects an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is released, and the recovery condition is satisfied. When this is done, the second output buffer is initialized and the error display data is erased. Therefore, the second output is performed for the period from the time when the error is detected until the recovery condition is satisfied, that is, the period during which the error occurs. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, it has become possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, an error occurrence status determination, using the data set in the second output buffer. There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, while holding the data set in the first output buffer as it is, so that the first Using the data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, determining the control status such as whether the navigation notification is being performed or the data is being paid out.

Further, after setting the error display data in the second output buffer, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied, so that the output is output. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer without delay.

Further, even in such a configuration, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The payout number display data may be updated to control the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated. Even in such a configuration, an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. Then, when the error display condition is satisfied, the payout number display data in the middle of updating is output as the first output during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed based on the first output buffer, so that the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is errored. Can be restored to the display content when is detected.

In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In a configuration including an output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as a normal display content and an error code indicating the content of an error occurring as a special display content on the game auxiliary display. It is a configuration that can be displayed on 12, and by setting the first output buffer as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting the navigation notification display data in the first output buffer, the normal display contents are displayed. It is possible to display the navigation number as, and when the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition to display the special display content in the state where the normal display content is displayed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By switching from the first output buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with the special display content based on the data set in the second output buffer, and the error state is cleared. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the second output buffer to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is again navigated as the first display content. Even with the configuration in which the numbers are displayed, different types of information can be correctly displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as in the configuration of the present embodiment.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, the main control unit 41 displays the error code as the special display content before the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition, and after the error is detected, the content of the error that has occurred. By configuring the error display data including the error code indicating the above to be set, the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content is output to the second output without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied. The timing to set in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination), the data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer can be referred to, so that the first output buffer can be referred to. Since the predetermined determination process can be performed using the data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, the data set in the second output buffer), a predetermined determination is made. It is not necessary to have the data used for processing separately from the data of the display contents.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration provided with, as the normal display contents, the number of medals to be paid out to the player (first display contents) upon winning a prize, and the display period do not overlap with the first display contents, which is an advantageous operation for the player. The main control unit 41 sets the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, including the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can be used. By configuring the configuration to display the number of medals paid out and the navigation number, different display contents that do not overlap in the display period can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting them in the first output buffer. There is no need to provide an extra output buffer.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. When a power failure is detected, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set regardless of which display is being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. By configuring the configuration to initialize the existing data, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the game control board 40 is connectable to the test apparatus 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and is slotted. A test signal generated in relation to the result of the game in the machine 1 is output from the game control board 40 to the test device 1300, and a test signal is input from the test device 1300 to the game control board 40. By connecting the game control board 40 and the test device 1300, it is possible to automatically perform a simulation test.

The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1100 and is connected to the first information output circuit 40a for outputting the first test signal, the input circuit 40d for inputting the test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 for the second test. A second information output circuit 40b that outputs a signal is mounted.

The first test signal shows the control state and the result of the game, and the input request lamp signal, the startable lamp signal, the BB signal, the RB game signal, the replay game signal, and the 1st to 3rd reels can be stopped. Lamp signal, 1st to 3rd reel index signals, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, signal delay signal, 1st Includes a reel motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal. These first test signals are output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start enable LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start enable LED 18 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not the game start operation is required. ..

The BB in-game signal, the RB game in-game signal, and the replay game in-game signal are signals indicating that the game state is in the BB, RB, or replay game, respectively, and the game state at that time can be specified.

The 1st to 3rd reel stop possible lamp signals are drive signals of the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, that is, signals indicating whether or not the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are lit. Therefore, it is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel can be stopped.

The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

The payout request signal is a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is being driven, and it is possible to specify that the medal payout operation is being performed.

The payout count signal is a signal output every time the payout of medals accompanying a winning is detected, and is a signal for counting the payout of medals on the test apparatus 1300 side.

The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.

The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are driving signals of LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. ..

The internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals are signals indicating the winning status of the winning combination. Further, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is delayed due to the execution of the effect during the game.

The first to third reel motor excitation signals are the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the driving status of each reel can be specified. ..

The test signal includes an on switch signal, a reel start switch signal, a 1st to 3rd reel stop switch signal, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal, and is controlled by the test apparatus 1300. It is input to the board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of various switches and sensors included in the slot machine 1, are detected by the switch detection circuit 44 included in the game control board 40, and are each test signal by the main control unit 41. The detection of the switch or sensor corresponding to is determined.

The throw-in switch signal is a signal corresponding to the throw-in medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting the first test signal to the IF1 substrate 1100, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is via the IF1 substrate 1100. Is output to the test device 1300.

The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. ..

The IF1 board 1100 includes an input terminal for inputting a first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a, and an output terminal for outputting the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information contained in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically isolated from the test apparatus 1300. It is designed to be transmitted to the side. Further, the IF1 board 1100 includes an input terminal for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 and an output terminal for outputting the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler so that the information contained in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically isolated state. It has become. It is sufficient that the first test signal and the test signal are transmitted in a state where the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically isolated. For example, the input terminal and the output via a photo interrupter or an isolator. It may be configured to connect to a terminal.

The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. Further, as for the navigation signal, the navigation notification display data for displaying the navigation number on the game assistance display 12 is the output buffer of the game assistance display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above. It is a drive signal for lighting the 8th segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the setting of, and the navigation notification is executed, and the type of the winning notification target combination and the game When the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the person is displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R, it is turned on, the navigation notification is not executed, and the navigation number is not displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by sometimes turning off.

The display signal is based on the fact that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 in a lighting mode for displaying any of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code, and is related to the navigation notification. It includes a plurality of information such as information, information on the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and information on an error code indicating the content when an error occurs.

The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal by the conversion circuit 40c mounted on the second information output circuit, and the navigation number is displayed during the navigation notification. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal capable of specifying the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 board 1200, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is via the IF2 board 1200. Is output to the test device 1300.

Further, in the second information output circuit 40b, the navigation signal and the display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 are branched and input on the game control board 40. In addition, a conversion circuit 40c is provided to convert the display signal into a navigation notification signal by enabling or disabling the display signal based on the navigation signal, and assist the game when the navigation signal is output. The display signal of the display 12 can be output to the IF2 board 1200 as a navigation notification signal.

The IF2 board 1200 is a test device based on an input terminal to which a second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and the input second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal). It includes an IF2 control unit 1203 that converts a second test signal that can be recognized by the 1300 side, and an output terminal that outputs a second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test device 1300. ..

The IF2 control unit 1203 is composed of a CPU, RAM, ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like, and the navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is designated as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel. It is converted into a signal and stop strobe signal and output. The stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, and stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler, and are output from the IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test device 1300 side. The signal is transmitted in a state of being electrically isolated from and. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be electrically isolated, and the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal may be transmitted. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator may be used. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected to each other via the device.

The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and the effect mode, and is a corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor can be specified.

The stop reel designation signal is a signal that specifies whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and stops. It is possible to specify the reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied.

The stop strobe signal is a signal requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

Further, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 are connected via a power supply line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power supply line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1200 are not connected by a power supply line, but the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 are connected via a power supply line and supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. A part of the generated electric power is supplied via the IF1 substrate 1100 as electric power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 substrate 1200. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 via the power supply line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1200 are used. Power is supplied so that both of the and are secured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be connected, a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A wiring pattern for transmitting the first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and a second test signal are provided together with a possible socket. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 via the input circuit 40d are formed, and the main control unit 41 is formed. The first test signal and the second test signal output from the various drive circuits are output via these wiring patterns, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the connection terminal, and the connection terminal. , The test signal input via the input circuit 40d and the wiring pattern is input to the switch detection circuit 44.

Further, since the connection terminal is composed of, for example, a signal pin to which a probe from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected and a connector to which a cable from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected, the connection terminal is connected to the IF1 board 1100 via these connection terminals. It is possible to easily connect the wiring of.

Further, the connection terminals are provided for convenience in connecting the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to the amusement store. It is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine to be used. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is formed with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminal, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment to, it is possible to disconnect the portion provided with the connection terminal so that unnecessary signals cannot be input / output. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

Further, the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for convenience in order to output the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200. The input circuit 40d is provided for convenience in order to input a test signal from the IF1 board 1100, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game shop. be. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is provided with a socket on which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the first information output circuit 40a are provided. 2 The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed. At the time of shipment to the amusement store, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are removed and unnecessary. It is possible to make it impossible to input and output various signals. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

It should be noted that the number of slot machines provided by a third party organization for conducting tests is usually about several, and other slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores receive these test signals and test signals. Since there is little need to output, these slot machines for mass production may be equipped with a game control board 40 which has a wiring pattern but does not have the above-mentioned connection terminal, thereby mass-producing. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for the machine. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200, and the test device 1300 can be mounted only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect easily. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal and a connection terminal for connecting to the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200 and the test device 1300, and the slot machine for mass production is provided with a connection terminal. , These wiring patterns and connection terminals may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

Further, the slot machine for mass production is equipped with the game control board 40 which does not have the sockets of the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d described above, although the wiring pattern is formed. However, this can reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, a socket is mounted to mount the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b. The IF1 board, IF2 board, and test device 1300 can be easily connected only by attaching the input circuit 40d. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal, and a socket for attaching the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d, and is used for mass production. The slot machine may not be provided with these wiring patterns or sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

In this embodiment, the simulation test is automatically performed by exchanging the test signal and the test signal between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300. As a result of these tests, it is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine 1. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times the payout count signal was detected during the test period (the number of medals paid out) to the number of times the input switch signal was output during the test period (the number of medals consumed) was calculated. The result (number of consumption / number of payouts) will be output as the payout rate.

The IF2 control unit 1203 indicates a reel that first recommends a stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel, depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification, within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the game start signal is output by the main control unit 41. It is updated to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to the output state indicating the recommended stop operation position for the reel, and a certain time (50 ms) after the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal is completed. A stop strobe signal is output over a period of time, the recommended first stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, a certain time (50 ms) is waited. Next, in the same procedure, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, which are sequentially recommended, are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has elapsed.

In this way, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially transfers the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 according to the recommended operation mode. By notifying the response, the operating procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

In this embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously set with respect to the test apparatus 1300 for a maximum of 2 seconds. However, it is also possible to transmit these sequentially at the start of the game and at the time when the reels are stopped, without transmitting these continuously.

The ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203 stores a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to the presence or absence of navigation notification, and the IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to the presence or absence of navigation notification. The operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. It should be noted that the IF2 control unit 1203 may acquire the recommended operation mode by using a program for determining the recommended operation mode according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification without having the recommended operation mode table registered in advance.

In this embodiment, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB and RB are not output, the stop on the left, middle and right. The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the stop reel is specified, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the constituent symbols of the cherry and the watermelon that may be missed can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. It should be noted that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the medal payout rate is highest in a situation where the navigation notification is not performed.

Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed and the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB and RB are output, the stop order is left, middle, and right. The stop reel designation signal is output in order, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol constituting the special combination according to the navigation number can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is elected as a special role and 11 is output as the navigation number, stop execution indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol of "red 7" can be pulled in for each rotating reel is executed. If the position signal is output and other BB2, RB, SB are won as special roles and 10, 12 and 13 are output as the navigation numbers, "blue" is output according to the output navigation number. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the symbols of "7", "white 7", and "BAR" can be drawn is output.

Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and the corresponding stop reel is arbitrarily selected. Outputs a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position.

As described above, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test apparatus 1300. The reel stop switch signal can be output on the device 1300 side in the recommended operation mode depending on the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by the test by the test device 1300.

Further, in this embodiment, after the special role (BB, RB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the special role is won after the implementation condition of the special role navigation notification determined by the main control unit 41 is satisfied. A navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol constituting the special combination is set, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode for stopping the symbol corresponding to the navigation number are set in the test device 1300. After winning the special role in the internal lottery in the slot machine on the market, after the winning of the special role is notified by the definite notification by the sub control unit 91, the operation is performed in the stop operation mode in which the special role is won. Is performed and the special role is won, the navigation number is output and the special role is won in the game after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied and the final notification is performed. The reel stop switch signal can be output depending on the operation mode, and the payout rate close to the payout rate in the market can be obtained by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

Further, in this embodiment, since a signal capable of specifying the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test device 1300, it is arranged on the reel. Even if the number of symbols or the number of steps assigned to one symbol differs depending on the model of the slot machine, the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal can be shared on the test apparatus 1300 side.

In the test system including the slot machine 1 of this embodiment and the test device 1300 capable of testing the game by the slot machine, the first test signal among the test signals output from the game control board 40 is , The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 substrate 1100, and the second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200.

In such a configuration, when power lines are connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 in order to supply power to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, the game control boards 40 and 1 The wiring between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1200 is increased.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 can be connected via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1100. Therefore, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and the power supplied to the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the IF1 board 1100 to the IF2 board 1200. , The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. On the other hand, the configuration is such that a second test signal can be output, and the game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1100 via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1100. While it can be supplied, it is not connected to the IF2 board 1200 via the power supply line, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and the power is not directly supplied to the IF2 board 1200 via the IF1 board 1100. Since the power can be supplied to the game control board 40, the wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to the navigation notification to the IF2 board 1200 as a second test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 can output the navigation notification signal. The IF2 control unit 1203 is provided with an IF2 control unit 1203 that generates signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) in a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board. Since it is operated by the power supply supplied from the 40 to the IF1 board 1100, it is not necessary to output the power from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and only the second test signal is output. The IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal in a mode that can be input by the test device 1300 and outputs the signal to the test device 1300, so that the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. can.

It should be noted that the game control board 40 may generate a second test signal in a mode that can be input by the test device 1300, and output the second test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. good.

Further, the IF1 board 1100 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1100 also has a control unit on which a CPU or the like is mounted and is mounted on the game control board 40. The output first test signal may be changed to a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300. With such a configuration, the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, a photocoupler is mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the input terminal and the output terminal on each board are connected via the photocoupler and output from the game control board 40. The first test signal and the second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocoupler mounted on the IF1 substrate 1100 and the IF2 substrate 1200, so that the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically connected. Since the devices are not connected to each other, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to an abnormality in one device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with indicators 12L and 12R that display the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are notified by the navigation notification. The display signal, which is a drive signal for lighting, is branched and output to the IF2 board as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, so that the indicators 12L and 12R The drive signal of can be used as a navigation notification signal.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification when the AT is controlled, and the game control board 40 sends a first test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100. The configuration includes a first information output circuit 40a for output and a second information output circuit 40b for outputting a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 board 1200 to the IF2 board 1200. The control unit 41 may not execute the navigation notification, and the game control board 40 may not output the navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1200. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the present embodiment may be used. Whether or not a means for executing the navigation notification and a means for outputting the navigation notification signal are provided by outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100 using the same circuit as the above. Regardless of this, the game control board 40 can have a common circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100.

Further, in this embodiment, the display signal and the navigation signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and only the information related to the navigation notification is extracted from the display signal by the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b to perform the navigation notification. The signal is generated and the navigation notification signal is transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200, but the main control unit 41 directly generates a signal containing only the information related to the navigation notification. By inputting the signal to the second information output circuit 40b, the signal may be transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200.

Further, it may be configured to output as a navigation notification signal by using all or a part of the data of the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, and the push order command transmitted to the sub control unit 91. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting the navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 can transmit a push order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies a navigation number based on the push order command, and the said The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn for the corresponding stop reel is output. It may be configured as a reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode in which the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by the navigation notification is such that the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by one lighting mode when the notification target combination is won, so that from the first stop. All the stop orders up to the third stop can be specified, and the drive signal for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R is branched in the lighting mode and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. As for the lighting mode for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R by the navigation notification, after indicating the reels 2L, 2C and 2R to be stopped next, the stopping order is sequentially changed by switching the lighting mode each time the stop operation is performed. It may be configured to notify so that it can be specified. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sends a signal capable of specifying all the stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the notification target combination is won. It is preferably configured to generate and transmit to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200, thereby specifying the stop order notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage on the test apparatus 1300 side. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the navigation notification is configured to notify the stop operation mode (stop order and stop operation timing) that is advantageous to the player, but the advantage for the player does not change as an effect. May be configured to perform navigation notification for performing the reel stop operation in a predetermined stop operation mode. In such a configuration, for example, as one re-game combination in which a prize is won and a re-game is given regardless of the stop order, the operation is performed in one stop order (for example, right, middle, left stop order). The combination of 1 symbols (for example, "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7") is stopped, and the stop operation is performed in another stop order (for example, left middle right stop order), so that the first symbol is used. In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols (for example, "replay-replay-replay") is stopped, when the main control unit 41 decides to stop the combination of the first symbols as an effect. , When it is decided not to stop the combination of the first symbol by outputting the navigation number indicating the stop order of one, the navigation number indicating the other stop order is output, so that the first effect is produced. When stopping the combination of the symbols of 1, the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and outputs the stop reel designation signal in the order of stopping the reels according to the navigation number. In addition, by outputting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel, the stop operation close to that of the slot machine on the market can be performed even by the test by the test device 1300. Can be done.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, on condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped, the advantage of the next game and thereafter is changed (the combination of the first symbols is stopped). A configuration in which the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state, a configuration in which the number of games controlled by the AT is added by stopping the combination of the first symbols, etc.), and a combination of the first symbols according to the navigation number. Even in the configuration in which the player is suggested to stop the operation mode, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol can be drawn in, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate in the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, a combination having the same degree of advantage (for example, a replay), a combination composed of a combination of the first symbols and a combination composed of a combination of the second symbols can be used. , Indicates a stop operation mode in which the winning combination of the first symbol combination can be won in order to simply stop the first symbol combination on the reel when winning in the internal lottery. When outputting the navigation number, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating, the reel can be stopped with a content close to the content of the stop mode of the reel stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game machine information display 50 is mounted on the game control board 40, and information necessary for determining the gambling of the game machine is displayed. As shown in FIG. 35, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in the board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the game machine information display 50 has the game control board 40. The displayed contents can be visually recognized via the substrate case 120a in a state of being housed in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a.

Therefore, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized via the board case 120a in a state where the front door 1b is open. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered. Specifically, at the position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, all parts such as reels and other boards provided in the slot machine 1 are not provided, and the display side of the game machine information display 50 is not provided. The wiring that connects the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. Further, in the board case 120a for accommodating the game control board 40 on which the game machine information display 50 is mounted, a seal sticker, an entry section for writing an opener, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. A label on which information such as the above is displayed, a sticking part on which the label is affixed, a display part on which the information is printed and engraved, a heat dissipation hole, parts such as a fan for heat dissipation, and the like are the game machine information display 50. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

Further, the substrate case 120a is designed to be sealed after accommodating the game control substrate 40, and in the sealed state, the sealing cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. It has become. As a method of sealing, there are a method of sealing the sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of the case, and a method of attaching a sealing sticker that remains after peeling. As a result, the connection line connecting the game machine information display 50 and the game control board 40 is disconnected, and the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is displayed correctly. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed, or to prevent fraud such as sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display 50 to hinder visibility.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a character payout ratio between the past 6000 games. , The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the game machine information display 50. Take control.

The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section related to AT in the past 6000 games. The advantageous section related to AT is a period from when the AT is won in the state where the AT is not won until all the control of the AT accompanying the winning AT is completed and the shift to the non-AT is completed. The ratio of advantageous sections to the total total number of games is a game controlled to an advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total number of games, which is the total number of games since the data of RAM 41c was initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. It is a ratio of numbers. The continuous payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the BB controlled between the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the total number of consecutive payouts. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games, which is paid out during the advantageous section related to AT controlled during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, which is the cumulative number of medals. The continuous payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the total number of medals paid out at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized. It is a ratio of the number of consecutive medals paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals paid out in the controlled BB from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present. The ratio of accessory payouts to the total cumulative payouts is the payouts in the BB and RB that have been controlled from the time the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the total total payouts at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. It is the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled from the time when the data of the RAM 41c was initialized to the present, or at the time of shipment from the factory to the total cumulative payout number. It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, which is the cumulative number of medals.

In this embodiment, as a bonus, only the RB and the BB in which the RB operates continuously are installed. Although all kinds of small winning medals are allowed to be won, some reels are pulled in. The number of medals paid out during the CT may be reflected in the bonus payout ratio when the CT and the CB in which the CT operates continuously may be mounted. , When the CB is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CB will be reflected in the consecutive payout ratio.

The main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games in the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Figure 36 shows the ratio of payouts for the characters in between, the ratio of payouts in the advantageous section between the past 6000 games, the ratio of the payouts for consecutive roles to the total number of total payouts, the ratio of the payouts for the goods to the total number of payouts, and the ratio of payouts in the advantageous section to the total number of total payouts. The display order is switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) and displayed on the game machine information display 50.

At this time, when the game machine information display 50 displays an abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed in the upper two digits (for example, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed, " "A1") is displayed, and the data to be displayed at present is displayed in the last two digits. In this embodiment, any ratio or ratio is displayed in%.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shows the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, the joint payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. 36. When the display order is switched and displayed at predetermined period intervals, the game may progress and these values may be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed. Even if there is, the update to the new value is restricted, and the display is cycled using the original value. Specifically, if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays are completed, the new values are calculated and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the game machine information display 50, the display on the game machine information display 50 can be displayed. The original value may be used to make a round, and when the round display is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer, and then the new value may be displayed. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until the end of the round, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted from performing the calculation for obtaining the new values. Is completed, and when the display of the round is completed, an operation for obtaining a new value may be performed, and then the display on the gaming machine information display 50 may be performed using the new value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratio calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 make a round.

Further, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, normal). If it is always lit, it blinks and lights up, etc.) to display the advantageous section ratio. Further, when the continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the continuous combination payment ratio to the total cumulative number of games exceed the specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 60%). If it is normally lit all the time, it will blink and lit, etc.) to display the continuous payout ratio. Further, when the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative number of games pay out exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 70%). If the normal lighting is always on, the accessory payout ratio is displayed by blinking lighting, etc.). Further, when the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 80%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 80%). If the normal lighting is always on, the advantageous section payout ratio is displayed by blinking lighting, etc.).

In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, they are displayed in a display mode different from the usual one, and the gambling is high. It is possible to warn that it may be controlled.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the display mode different from the usual one, for example, by blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the game has not reached 6000 games. It is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratios and ratios are biased.

In addition, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a character payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. Judge whether the data used to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts is normal. , When it is determined to be abnormal (when the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of advantageous section payouts is larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (01 repetition, etc.), etc.) Initializes the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, causes the game machine information display 50 to display that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF"), and notifies that fact. It is possible to recognize that the calculation of these data is not performed normally.

When initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, among the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the past 6000 games. If at least one of the above is determined to be abnormal, the data relating to all of them may be initialized, or only a part of the data may be initialized. If at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative number of games is determined to be abnormal, the data related to all of them should be initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in a part of the data for the past 6000 games, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative number of games is initialized. When an abnormality is determined, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total total number of games may be initialized.

In addition, it is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal, and it is determined to be abnormal. In that case, a predetermined operation is performed (for example, the switches such as the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, and the setting key switch 37 are operated by the predetermined procedure). By doing so, the data may be initialized.

Further, in the notification that an abnormality has been determined, as described above, even if the gaming machine information display 50 is made to display that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF") and notify that fact. Good, when an abnormality is determined, a command that can identify that fact is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 notifies that the abnormality has been determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do so.

In addition, the main control unit 41 has a period from the start of data collection to reaching 6000 games, that is, the ratio of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total cumulative number of games, and the continuous operation between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, bonus payout ratio between past 6000 games, advantageous section payout ratio between past 6000 games, consecutive payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, bonus payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, advantage over total cumulative payouts During the period when the data for calculating the section payout ratio and the like is insufficient, the display content of the game machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after 6000 games after the start of data collection (for example, constant). It is displayed (blinks at intervals, etc.), and it is possible to recognize that the data for calculating the displayed content is an insufficient period.

In this embodiment, the ratio of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total total number of games, the ratio of consecutive payments between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 during the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. The character payout ratio between games, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the character payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are specified. Although it is switched and displayed every period, it is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or the operation of a predetermined operation switch (for example, reset / setting switch 38) is performed. It is displayed only when it is detected, it is displayed when it is not in the game, it is displayed during the setting change status or setting confirmation, and it is displayed only for a specified period after the power is turned on. You may do so. Further, instead of automatically switching every predetermined period, the display content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game machine information indicates that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the game machine information display 50 has been determined and that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. Although the configuration is such that the display is notified using the display 50, a command that can identify that fact is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that it can be confirmed by the display or the effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the character payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. The advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. In addition to these displays, it becomes possible to recognize that the RAM 41c has been initialized by changing the settings, or when a disconnection is detected in the wiring provided in the slot machine 1 (such as the wiring of the backup power supply). The contents may be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

In particular, if the setting is changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carry-over of the bonus and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or if the bonus being carried over is cleared, the game is defined while the bonus is being carried over. More than a few were performed, or an operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed (for example, in RT2 and RT3 during AT, the RT1 transition replay or SB was intentionally won, or a specific symbol was stopped. When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player is intentionally shifted to a game state that is unfavorable to the player, etc.) is detected, and the game machine information display 50 is disconnected. When it is detected that the connection may not be performed normally due to the occurrence of the above, the fact is notified so as to be identifiable. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. ..

In addition, as will be described later, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data, when the total cumulative data etc. is initialized, that fact can be specified. It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and by doing so, overflow is avoided. It is possible to recognize that the total cumulative data has been initialized by the processing to be performed separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing the correct information from being displayed as the advantageous section ratio or the like.

In addition, if there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. as described above, that fact is detected. Then, the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and at the time of the detection, a predetermined operation (for example, a start switch 7, a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, a setting key switch 37, etc.) is performed without notifying the detection. By operating the switches according to a predetermined procedure, connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories are provided on the main control unit 41 side. It can be confirmed by a display (for example, a game machine information display 50, etc.), a display provided on the sub-control unit 91 side (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, etc.), an external display of the slot machine 1. You may.

In addition, the settings have been changed, the disconnection has been detected, and the connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 has occurred, which is correct as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. There is a possibility that the information may not be displayed, and as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. This may be confirmed by a display or an effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. In addition, the setting was changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carry-over of the bonus, and the bonus or advantageous section was forcibly terminated, or the bonus during the carry-over was cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the bonus payout ratio, etc. The sub-control unit 91 records the history of detection that there is a possibility of unauthorized operation so that correct information is not displayed as the continuous bonus payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and these are performed by a predetermined operation. You may be able to check the history of.

Next, the main control unit 41 will explain a method of aggregating and calculating data for displaying such information.

The main control unit 41 aggregates and calculates information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio, and displays information based on the calculation result on the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40. It is possible to execute the game machine information display process as the process. The program for performing the game machine information display process is included in the above-mentioned non-game program, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the game machine information display process is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b. It is remembered. Further, the main control unit 41 uses the non-game data area of the RAM 41c as a work when executing the game machine information display process. The non-game data area used by the main control unit 41 when executing the game machine information display process is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the backup power supply is used. As long as power is supplied, the stored contents of the non-game data area are stored. Further, the main control unit 41 initializes the data stored in the game data area of the RAM 41c by performing the operation of changing the set value as described above, but the game machine information display processing. The non-game data area used when executing is not targeted for initialization even when an operation for changing a set value is performed or when initialization conditions are satisfied for another game data area. In particular, the data for aggregating, calculating, and displaying the information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

As shown in FIG. 37, a game count counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is added to a predetermined area of the non-game data area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and is specified for each game. The first game number counter that is initialized every time the period (6000 games in this embodiment) elapses, 1 is added for each game, and a predetermined number (6000 games in this embodiment) is added to the specified period (6000 games in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the second game number counter, which is initialized every time the predetermined period (400 games in the present embodiment) divided by 15) elapses, is initialized by adding 1 for each game. A third game count counter is provided. In addition, the first to fifth data counting buffers capable of counting one set of data and the first to fifth ring buffers provided with 15 sets of buffers capable of storing 2 bytes of data in one set are set. Has been done.

The main control unit 41 is the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) using the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers. In the number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, which is the number of medals given during the period controlled by BB or RB in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment), in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) The number of consecutive payouts, which is the number of medals granted during the period controlled by BB, and the advantageous section controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning AT, control by AT) The number of medals granted in the period from when the game is played until the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed), the number of advantageous section payouts, and the AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). Counting the number of games in the game section, which is the number of games in the controlled advantageous section (the period from when the AT is won, after being controlled by the AT until the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed). Is possible.

Specifically, when the medals are paid out due to the winning of a small winning combination, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals paid out to the first data counting buffer, and BB or RB. In the period controlled by BB, when medals are paid out due to the winning of a small winning combination, the number of medals paid out is added to the second data counting buffer, and in the period controlled by BB. When medals are paid out due to the winning of a small role, the number of medals paid out is added to the third data counting buffer, and the advantageous section controlled by AT (after winning AT, it is controlled by AT). In the period from when the game is played until the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is finished), when the medals are paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination, the number of the paid out medals is the fourth. The game is played in the advantageous section controlled by the AT after adding to the data counting buffer (the period from when the AT is controlled to when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed). When it is broken, one game is added to the fifth data counting buffer. In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals to the first to fourth data counting buffers at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined. The timing at which the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer of the above may be the timing at which medals are actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (credit addition or detection of actual medal payout).

Then, every time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed based on the second game number counter, a predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (previously updated set + 1st set buffer). , If the first or last updated set is the 15th set, the 1st set buffer) is initialized, and the 1st to 5th data count counter values are set to the predetermined set of the 1st to 5th ring buffers. In addition to adding to the buffer, the first to fifth data counting buffer values are added to the 3-byte aggregated data areas A'to D'and F'provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c, respectively. Further, the 3-byte aggregated data areas a'to d'and f'provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and all the first to fifteenth sets of the first to fifth ring buffers are initialized. The data in the set buffer is sequentially added to the corresponding aggregated data areas a'to d', f'. After that, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. In addition, the aggregated data area E'is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

By performing these processes, the data of the buffers of a predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers and the aggregated data areas a'to d', f', and A'to F'are the latest in each predetermined period. It will be updated to the information of.

Further, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregated data areas a'to d'and A'to D'to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the aggregated data area Of these, it is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregated data area a'A'has reached 3 bytes, and for the data that has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregated data areas a'and A'is used. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas a and A provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. On the other hand, an extraction process for extracting a predetermined 16-bit amount of data having reached 3 bytes is performed, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary calculation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the extraction process, the highest rank is specified by referring to the data in the aggregated data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is specified in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest digit is extracted.

Further, for b'to d'of the aggregated data area, the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area b'to d'by 100 is a 3-byte primary calculation provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the data areas b "to d" respectively. After that, it is referred to whether or not the aggregated data area a has been extracted, and if the aggregated data area a has not been extracted, the data of the aggregated data areas b "to d" is not stored in the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas b to d provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the aggregated data area a is subjected to the extraction process, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area a is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas b to d.

Further, for B'to D'of the aggregated data area, the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area B'to D'by 100 is a 3-byte primary calculation provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the data areas B "to D" respectively. After that, it is referred to whether or not the aggregated data area A has been extracted, and if the aggregated data area A has not been extracted, the data of the aggregated data areas B "to D" is not stored in the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas B to D provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the aggregation process is performed on the aggregated data area A, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area A is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas B to D.

Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area b by the data in the secondary calculation data area a to determine the ratio of the total number of payouts in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). By calculating and dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of characters to be played in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated, and the secondary calculation data area By dividing the data of d by the data of the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of sheets to be paid out in the advantageous section in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated.

Further, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area B by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative total number of sheets to be paid out in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area B is obtained. By dividing by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative number of bonuses in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area C is divided by the data in the secondary calculation data area A. By dividing, the ratio of the cumulative number of consecutive cards in slot machine 1 is calculated, and by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area D by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the cumulative total in slot machine 1 is calculated. Calculate the ratio of the number of sheets paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregated data areas f', E', and F'to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the aggregated data in the aggregated data area. It is determined whether or not the data set in the area E'has reached 3 bytes, and if it has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the aggregated data area E'is provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the generated 2-byte secondary calculation data area E. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area E.

Further, for the aggregated data area f', a value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area f'by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area f "provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. , It is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregated data area f "has reached 3 bytes, and if it has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregated data area f" is used as the non-gaming data of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area f provided in the area. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary calculation data area f. ..

Further, it refers to whether or not the aggregation data area f has been extracted, and if the aggregation data area f has not been extracted, the number of games in the predetermined period of 6000 is set to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area g provided in. On the other hand, when the aggregation data area f is subjected to the extraction processing, the extraction processing is performed for 6000 games in a predetermined period, the highest level specified in the extraction processing of the aggregation data area f is specified, and the said The data for 16 bits below the highest level is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area g.

Further, for the aggregated data area F', the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area F'by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area F "provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Refers to whether or not the aggregated data area E has been extracted, and if the aggregated data area E has not been extracted, the data in the aggregated data area F ”is transferred to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary calculation data area F. On the other hand, when the aggregation process is performed on the aggregated data area E, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area E is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area F.

Then, the main control unit 41 calculates the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total total number of games in the slot machine 1 by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area F by the data in the secondary calculation data area E. Then, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area f by the secondary calculation data area g, the ratio of the number of advantageous section games in a predetermined period is calculated.

The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area at predetermined time intervals, and determines the ratio of the total number of payouts for a predetermined period, the ratio of the total total number of payouts for a predetermined period, and the number of consecutive payouts for a predetermined period. Percentage, percentage of the number of bonuses paid out for a predetermined period, percentage of the number of coupons paid out in the advantageous section for a predetermined period, percentage of the total number of coupons paid out in a row, percentage of the total number of bonuses paid out, the percentage of total number of coupons paid out in the advantageous section By specifying the ratio and setting it in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50, the game machine information display 50 is displayed.

The main control unit 41 calculates the secondary calculation data based on the data of the first to fifth ring buffers when the predetermined period elapses, that is, updates the secondary calculation data every time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, the previously calculated secondary calculation data is maintained until the predetermined period elapses, and the game machine information display 50 displays the total number of payouts and the like based on the secondary calculation data. After that, until the next predetermined period elapses, the total number of payouts and the like at the time when the previous predetermined period elapses will be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

By specifying the number of advantageous section games and the cumulative number of advantageous section games in a predetermined period in addition to the above-mentioned total number of payouts and the like for each predetermined time, the number of advantageous section games is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50. , The game machine information display 50 may be configured to display the information.

Further, in this embodiment, when the total cumulative data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, a process for avoiding the overflow is executed. Erase the related data once.

Specifically, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number is all the data used in the calculation (in this embodiment, the total number of payments, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of games, and the advantageous section game. You may want to initialize all the aggregated data of the number of times, or when some relatively relevant data (for example, the aggregated data A'of the total number of payouts reaches the specified number as the total accumulated data). The total data B'ratio of the number of consecutive payouts used together with the aggregated data A'when calculating the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the aggregated data C'of the number of bonus payouts, When the aggregated data D'of the number of advantageous section payouts and the aggregated data E'of the number of games as the total cumulative data reach the specified number, it is used together with the aggregated data E'when calculating the advantageous section ratio (F / E). The aggregated data F') of the number of advantageous section games to be obtained may be initialized.

When the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are reduced by a predetermined ratio (for example, the total cumulative data). To avoid overflow of the total cumulative data by multiplying the current value by 0.5, etc.), at this time, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data. All the data in the above may be reduced by a predetermined ratio, or the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and some data that are relatively related to the total cumulative data may be reduced by a predetermined ratio. You can do it.

In addition, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, when the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized or reduced, etc., the total cumulative data The specified number may be the maximum value of the total accumulated data (the maximum value of the value that can be stored in each aggregated data area (3 bytes) of the RAM 41c), or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of the total accumulated data (the maximum value). It may be a value that can be cut well within 3 bytes, for example, "16000000 (decimal number)" or the like).

Further, in this embodiment, when the total cumulative data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is related once as a process for avoiding the overflow. Although the configuration is such that the data is erased, the counting may be stopped without erasing the related data.

Further, the data displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 may be executed for each game, or may be executed only for the game in which a prize is generated.

Since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, in this embodiment, the calculation is performed by using the following first calculation method. In the first calculation method, first, the value of the numerator is multiplied by 100. Then, this value multiplied by 100 is divided by the value of the denominator. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

As the calculation method performed by the microcomputer that cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following second calculation method may be used. In the second calculation method, first, the value of the denominator is divided by 100. Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In addition, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower bits are truncated as necessary in order to facilitate the calculation. By using such a calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However, as the calculation period becomes longer, the error is reduced and the value is approximated to the original value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the calculation is performed using the value as it is without truncating the lower bits, and the value to be calculated is 2 bytes. When it exceeds, the operation is performed using the value obtained by truncating the lower bits.

In the conventional slot machine, the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value.

However, with such a conventional method, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value after the device is installed in the game store.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason), the total number of medals given is in the specific period. Since the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section), are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. It is possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine 1 is controlled in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value even after it is shipped to the market.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of games controlled in an advantageous period (advantageous section) in a specific period (between the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or the period from the initialization of the data of the RAM 41c to the present for some reason). Since the advantageous section ratio, which is a ratio, is calculated and displayed on the game machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm information that is the degree of gambling even after the game is shipped to the market.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section during a specific period (between the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or the period from the initialization of the data of the RAM 41c to the present for some reason) is advantageous. The section ratio is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, but a specific period (the period from the past 6000 games, the factory shipment, or the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data to the present). The ratio of the number of games controlled by bonuses such as BB and RB may be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even in such a configuration, the degree of gambling even after being shipped to the market. You can check the information that becomes.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). When calculating the ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not these original data satisfy the predetermined conditions. The optimum calculation method can be selected according to the data to be obtained. For example, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section of a specific period are within 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation can be used as it is without processing, and the continuous payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantage. While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section in a specific period exceed 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes. By calculating the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated by the optimum calculation method with less error.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between the past 6000 games). The total number of medals awarded in the second period (the period from the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data to the present). The continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the second period, are calculated. In addition to being displayed on the display 50, when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the consecutive combination payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio in the second period, When calculating the advantageous section payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by a common calculation method. The method of calculating the material payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio may be different from the method of calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. For example, in the above example, when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 so that the result is%, but the denominator is multiplied by 1/100. If the result is%, the total number of payouts in the first period can be kept within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, when calculating the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the continuous combination payout is used as it is without processing the data that is the basis of the calculation. While calculating the ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, when calculating the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period, the data that is the basis of the calculation is 2 By calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio after processing the data into bytes or less, the continuous combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, etc. It becomes possible to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). Since the data used to calculate the ratio is stored separately from the total number of payouts in the specific period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section in the specific period, the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section in the specific period are stored separately. The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the predetermined number of games is divided by the predetermined number (15). 15 sets that store the total number of payouts during the period of the number (400 games), the number of bonuses paid out during the predetermined number of games, the number of consecutive payouts during the predetermined number of games, and the number of advantageous section payouts during the predetermined number of games. A ring buffer consisting of the above buffers is provided, and the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, and the number of advantageous section payouts stored in these ring buffers are added up to obtain the total number of payouts in a specific number of games. , The number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive coins paid out, and the number of advantageous section payouts are calculated, and the continuous role payout ratio, the bonuses payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of a specific number of games (6000 games) are calculated. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the latest specific number of games.

Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the advantageous section ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the advantageous section of the period of the predetermined number of games (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific number of games by the predetermined number (15). A ring buffer consisting of 15 sets of buffers for storing the number of games is provided, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the period of a specific number of games is calculated by adding up the number of games in the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers. The number of games in the advantageous section in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games) is calculated, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the latest specific number of games can be easily calculated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in the board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the game machine information display 50 has the game control board 40. The displayed contents can be visually recognized via the substrate case 120a in a state of being housed in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a. Further, the substrate case 120a is designed to be sealed after accommodating the game control substrate 40, and in the sealed state, the sealing cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine information display 50 from being illegally worked.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to display the game RAM area in which data according to the progress of the game is stored in the RAM 41c, and the game machine information display 50 for displaying the bonus payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, and the like. When the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied by the transition to the setting change state or the like, the data in the game RAM area is initialized while the non-game RAM area is provided. Since the data in the RAM area is not initialized, even if the initialization conditions are satisfied, the winning combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. can be calculated and displayed in consideration of the data before that. ..

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals awarded during a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The machine information display 50 is configured to display, and the game machine information display 50 makes it possible to visually recognize the displayed contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. At the same time, the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is arranged inside the housing 1a, and the inside of the housing 1a hinders the visibility of the game machine information display 50. Since it is configured so that there is no such thing, it is possible to check the display of the gaming machine information display 50 simply by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, and based on the display of the gaming machine information display 50, It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the design value.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the settings are changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section, or during the carry-over of the bonus, and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus being carried over is cleared. The game was played more than the specified number while the bonus was being carried over, the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed, or the connection failure occurred in the gaming machine information display 50, that is, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory It is designed to detect that there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the payout ratio, the joint payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. Since it is detected that an event has occurred in which the correct information such as the winning combination payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio may not be properly displayed by the gaming machine information display 50, such information should not be displayed properly. You can prevent fraud.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals awarded during a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and when the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio reaches a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, By executing the process to avoid overflow and deleting the related data once, the upper limit is the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio. Since it is avoided to exceed the limit, even if the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the continuous payout ratio exceeds the upper limit, the continuous payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout. The ratio can be calculated and this information can be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals awarded during a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 periodically displays information such as the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio on the machine information display 50 in the game machine information display 50 in a predetermined display order. The display is switched to the target (every 30 seconds in this embodiment), and these values are new values within one period until the display of these consecutive payout ratios, etc. is completed. Even if it can be updated to, the update to a new value is restricted and the display is cycled using the original value, so that a lot of information such as the continuous payout ratio in the gaming machine information display 50 Can be displayed efficiently, and information updated at the same time is displayed as multiple types of information displayed in one cycle, so information at different times may be mixed in one cycle. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games. To calculate the bonus section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number. It is determined whether the data to be used is normal, and if at least one of these data is determined to be abnormal, the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and an abnormality is detected. Since the display to that effect (for example, "FFFF") is set to the game machine information display 50 to notify the fact, the data necessary for calculating the advantageous section ratio and the like has been initialized. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the calculation of these data is not performed normally and the advantageous section ratio or the like may not be a normal value.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals awarded during a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game, that is, at the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination to which the medal is paid out. At that time, the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the medals to be actually paid out and the payout is completed. The data used to calculate the bonus payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be updated.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when the occurrence of a small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the numbers are added may be the timing at which medals are actually awarded due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (credit addition or detection of actual medal payout), and such a configuration is used. Therefore, when the medal is stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination to be paid out, after the medal is actually paid out and the payout is completed, the continuous combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio The data used in the calculation of can be updated.

Although the first and modified examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these first and modified examples, and changes and additions are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, even if there is, it is included in the present invention.

In the first embodiment and the modified example, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet number is set by using medals and credits as a game value has been described, but a bet number using a game ball as a game value has been described. It may be applied to a slot machine that sets a bet number or a fully credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using only credits as a game value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the first embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, the value is not limited to using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated when a prize is generated. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be applied.

The second embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, different points will be mainly described here.

In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 when the medals are paid out due to the winning of the small winning combination, and the medals are paid out. When the number of medals is less than 10, a one-digit number indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals paid out is 10 or more. In the case of, the number of the first digit (one's place) indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of the second digit (ten's place) is displayed. Is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and when displaying the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the display is mainly displayed among the game auxiliary display 12. It is a configuration using 12R. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number (0 to 13) on the game auxiliary display 12 when performing the navigation notification, and if the navigation number is less than 10, the navigation is concerned. A one-digit number indicating the number is displayed on the display 12R of the game assistance display 12, and when the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (one digit) indicating the navigation number is used for the game assistance. In addition to displaying on the display 12R of the display 12, the second digit (tens digit) number is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number. When displaying the navigation number, the display 12R is mainly used among the game auxiliary display 12, as in the case of displaying the number of medals to be paid out.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment mainly uses the first display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the medals are paid out. The number of medals is displayed, and the navigation number is displayed mainly by using the second display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the navigation notification is performed, if the navigation number is less than 10, the main control unit 41 displays a one-digit number indicating the navigation number as a game assistance display. It is displayed on the display 12L of the device 12, and when the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (one digit) indicating the navigation number is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. At the same time, by displaying the second digit (tens digit) on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Of these, the display 12L is mainly used.

In this way, in the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, the winning combination accompanied by the payout of medals is won by the internal lottery, and the combination of the symbols of the winning combination is on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. By stopping at, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a navigation notification is performed to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode. In the game auxiliary display 12 whose main control unit 41 directly controls the display, when paying out medals, the number of medals paid out to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation is performed. At the time of notification, it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify an advantageous stop operation mode for the player.

In such a configuration, both the number of medals paid out to the player and the stop operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on one game auxiliary display 12, so that the displayed contents are misunderstood. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 in which the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out as predetermined contents is composed of a plurality of displays 12L and 12R, and the main control unit 41 has predetermined contents. As a display content different from that, since it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the game assistance display 12, the game assistance, which is a display means for displaying a predetermined content, is possible. By displaying the navigation number using the display 12, the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed without providing a new display means, and the main control unit 41 can display the plurality of displays 12L and 12R. Of these, the display 12R is mainly used as the first display to display the predetermined contents, and the navigation number is displayed mainly using the display 12L as the second display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R. , It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the display content displayed on the game assist display 12 which is the display means is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

The stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, which can be identified by the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the navigation notification, is an operation mode in which the operation is performed in any one of a plurality of operation orders, or a plurality of operation modes. It may be an operation mode in which the operation is performed at any of the different operation timings, or an operation mode in which these are combined.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12, only the number indicating the number of medals to be paid out constitutes the game auxiliary display 12. Of the plurality of indicators 12L and 12R, the first indicator 12R is mainly used to display the predetermined contents, that is, the predetermined contents are displayed using only the first display. , A configuration in which a predetermined content is displayed by using a display other than the first display as an auxiliary in addition to the first display, for example, a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out is mainly displayed on the first display 12R. In addition to displaying the display, the second display 12L may be configured to display a payout symbol (for example, "=" or "") indicating that the payout is in progress.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, only the numbers indicating the navigation numbers are displayed on the plurality of indicators 12L constituting the game auxiliary display 12. Of the 12R, the configuration is mainly to be displayed on the second display 12L, that is, the navigation number is displayed using only the second display, but when the navigation number is displayed, the second display is used. In addition, a configuration in which a navigation number is displayed by using a display other than the second display as an auxiliary, for example, a navigation number among the display 12L and the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 when performing a navigation notification. Is being executed on the display 12R, which is different from the display 12L that mainly displays, and the navigation symbol indicating that the navigation number is being displayed (for example, "." In FIG. 39 (b), The configuration may be such that "=") and the like shown in FIG. 39 (c) are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize from the contents displayed on the first display 12R that the contents displayed on the second display 12L correspond to the operation mode.

Further, in the configuration in which the navigation symbol is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is performed, the navigation symbol may be a fixed display or a display that changes at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the main control unit 41 may be configured to change the navigation symbol every time a stop operation is performed, or the navigation symbol may be changed at predetermined time intervals. The configuration may be changed. In such a configuration, the navigation symbol can be easily recognized by changing the navigation symbol. Further, in the configuration in which the navigation symbol is changed each time the stop operation is performed, whether the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed is the first stop operation depending on the display mode of the displayed navigation symbol. , It is possible to grasp whether it is the second stop operation or the third stop operation.

The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment displays a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the game auxiliary display 12 as display contents different from the predetermined contents. It is possible to display the number of medals to be paid out, which is information about the result of the game, as a predetermined content, even though the navigation number that informs the player in an advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game. On the other hand, since the predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, the display period does not overlap.

In the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a navigation number capable of identifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R as display contents different from the predetermined contents in the game auxiliary display 12. The number of medals to be paid out, which is the predetermined content, and the navigation number different from the predetermined content are configured so that the periods displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 do not overlap, but the predetermined content. The display content different from the predetermined content may be content whose display periods may overlap or may not overlap. For example, the displayed periods may overlap. As a configuration without the above, the main control unit 41 controls to an error state when an abnormality is detected, and in a configuration in which control related to the game such as paying out medals is disabled in the error state, the display content is different from the predetermined content. The game auxiliary display 12 may display an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred when the error state is controlled. Even in such a configuration, the game auxiliary display is displayed by mainly using the second display 12L, which is different from the first display 12R mainly used when displaying the number of medals to be paid out, to display the error code. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the display content displayed in 12 is an error code or the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content.

In the predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, lighting mode data, which is display data for displaying the predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display 12, is lit in advance for each display content. The mode data table is stored, and the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number by the navigation notification as the display content other than the predetermined content even when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content. Even in the case of making the lighting mode data table, the common lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table can be used to display predetermined display contents on the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to reduce the amount of display data for displaying a predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display 12.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

Example 3 of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, different points will be mainly described here. The composition of the lottery target combination in Example 3 is different from that in Example 1. In the third embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target combination, the sub-control unit uses a second internal winning command that can specify the notification target combination but cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. This is an example of transmitting to 91. Further, in the third embodiment, when the winning numbers are 2 to 19, 23 to 34 in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, it can be specified that the winning combination has been the notification target, but it is advantageous for the player. This is an example of transmitting a second internal winning command whose stop order cannot be specified to the sub-control unit 91. Also in the first embodiment, the winning number and the winning number for transmission are the same as those in the third embodiment (see FIG. 14). Therefore, it is possible to apply the third embodiment to the first embodiment and transmit the second internal winning command to the sub-control unit 91 as in the third embodiment.

Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, the control contents of the internal winning command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target combination, and a lottery target combination that may be carried over, that is, a special combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special combination is set. A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the special winning combination number table, when none of the special winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", and the winning number of BB is "1", which is RB. The winning number is assigned "1".

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the general winning combination winning number table, when none of the general winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", and the winning number of the normal replay is "1". , The winning number of replay GR1 is "2", the winning number of replay GR2 is "3", the winning number of replay GR3 is "4", and the winning number of replay GR4 is "5". The winning number of GR5 is "6", the winning number of replay GR6 is "7", the winning number of replay GR11 is "8", and the winning number of replay GR12 is "9". The winning number is "10", the winning number of the replay GR14 is "11", the winning number of the replay GR15 is "12", and the winning number of the replay GR16 is "13". The winning number of the replay GR22 is "15", the winning number of the replay GR23 is "16", the winning number of the replay GR24 is "17", and the winning number of the replay GR25 is "17". "18" is assigned, and "19" is assigned as the winning number of the replay GR26. The winning number of the strong cherry is "20", the winning number of the strong cherry is "21", and the winning number of the watermelon is "22". The winning number of the left bell 1 is "23", the winning number of the left bell 2 is "24", the winning number of the left bell 3 is "25", and the winning number of the left bell 4 is "". "26", the winning number of the middle bell 1 is "27", the winning number of the middle bell 2 is "28", the winning number of the middle bell 3 is "29", and the winning number of the middle bell 4 is "29". , "30", the winning number of the right bell 1 is "31", the winning number of the right bell 2 is "32", the winning number of the right bell 3 is "33", the winning number of the right bell 4 The number is assigned "34", and the winning number of the common bell is assigned "35".

In this way, in the special winning combination winning number table and the general winning combination winning number table, the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery, the combination is selected. , The winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination for which the winning is determined is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when none of the winning combinations is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared after each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. It will be cleared.

After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes the internal winning command setting process, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning are based on the internal winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, in the internal winning command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of two bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores a MODE indicating that it is the first internal winning command in the first byte, and wins a special role in the EXT of the second byte. Store the number.

In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Winning obtained by sequentially determining whether or not there is (Sf5), whether or not it is less than 20 (Sf6), whether or not it is less than 23 (Sf7), and whether or not it is less than 35 (Sf8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 for transmission winning. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step of Sf5 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 20 in the step of Sf6, that is, when the winning number is any of 2 to 19, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 20 in the step of Sf6 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 23 in the step of Sf7, that is, when the winning number is any of 20 to 22, the winning number is assigned. The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 23 in the step of Sf7 and less than 35 in the step of Sf8, that is, when the winning number is any of 23 to 34, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 23 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in the step of Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 35, that is, if the winning number is 35, the winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmitting winning number (Sf9).

Then, after setting the transmission winning number of the general combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps of Sf9, Sf10, and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When the main control unit 41 stores the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and serves as a general role in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission.

After storing the second internal winning command in the command queue in the step of Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmitting winning number, and the first winning number including the transmitting winning number is set. Set the internal winning command of to the command queue.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 20 to 22, 35). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 20 to 22, 35) is set in the internal winning, the command is used. The winning number by the internal lottery can be specified based on the included sending winning number.

On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 19), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 19) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2 to 19) the winning number is based on the above, while the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 19). It is possible to identify something.

If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34), one winning number (23) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (23 to 34) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (23 to 34) the winning number is based on, while the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34). It is possible to identify something.

The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently executed by the timer interrupt processing (main) to the sub-control unit 91. Will be transmitted sequentially.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example and other data. The form may be used. Further, in this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes are transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and 2 of each command. Although the configuration includes the winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command and the second internal Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the 3rd byte includes the special winning transmission winning number or the general winning transmission winning number, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be composed of one signal consisting of 3 bytes, the 2nd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the special combination, and the 3rd byte may include the winning number for transmission of the general combination.

In this embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are assigned separately, that is, the winning numbers of the special winning combination corresponding to the types and deviations of the special winning combination (BB, RB) in the special winning combination winning number table are assigned. It is configured to set and set the winning number of the general role according to the type and the loss of the general role in the general role winning number table, and the main control unit 41 sets the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the special role according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number of the general winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without dividing the special winning combination and the general winning combination. For example, BB + strong cherry, etc. shown in FIG. 24) ”may be used as one lottery target combination, and a winning number may be assigned. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based only on the one winning number. It is possible to determine whether or not the reels are being used, and perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

In the third embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the winning status of the first internal winning command and the general winning combination, which can specify the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result, as the internal winning command capable of specifying the internal lottery result. It is possible to set a possible second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process and send the set command to the sub-control unit 91, and whether or not it is controlled by the AT in the internal winning command setting process. Regardless of this, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the general role is related so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Since the internal winning command of 2 is set, the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is specified from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, the process related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified and the sub-control unit can be simplified. Even if the 91 side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlled.

In the third embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery when the start operation is performed, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning. It is configured to set the internal winning flag according to the number, perform navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc., and as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result, the winning status of the special role A first internal winning command that can specify and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of a general winning combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target combination is won as the internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay as the notification target combination is 2 to 19, and the winning number of the push order bell is Is assigned to a continuous numerical value consisting of 23 to 34), and is set in the RAM 41c in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed while being controlled by the AT in the internal winning command setting process. When the winning number is in the predetermined numerical range (2 to 19, 23 to 34), it is possible to specify that the winning combination has become the notification target, but it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player. Is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, so that the second internal winning command is used regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the stop order that is advantageous for the player is not specified according to the result of the internal lottery, even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, the stop order that is advantageous for the player is navigated in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. It is possible to prevent being notified by the production. Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 uses the internal lottery result as the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, the second internal winning command is transmitted. The processing when doing so can be simplified.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

It is equipped with a plurality of variable display units that can be variablely displayed by rotating a reel on which multiple types of identification information that can be identified by a stepping motor that is driven by changing the excitation state are arranged.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, and a prize can be generated according to a combination of the display results of a plurality of the variable display units. ,
A derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An information display means for displaying operation mode information capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation means, and
A derivation operation receiving means that can accept the operation of the derivation operation means and accepts the operation of the derivation operation means when the activation condition is satisfied after the rotation of the reel starts.
After the reel starts to rotate, regardless of whether the activation condition is satisfied or not, when normal rotation is not detected, a rotation abnormality determining means for determining a rotation abnormality, and a rotation abnormality determining means.
A restart control means that performs restart control that changes the excitation state according to the pattern at the start of rotation of the reel when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal.
When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the activation condition is satisfied, the restart means for restarting the control for changing the excitation state from the excitation state when the power supply is stopped, and
With
The derivation operation receiving means
Operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is not normally performed during the variable display of the specific variable display unit. Is not accepted, and when it is detected that the variable display of the specific variable display unit is normally performed, the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit is accepted.
The information display means continuously displays the operation mode information until the display end condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the operation of the derivation operation means is accepted.
The restart control means also performs restart control when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal after the control for changing the excitation state is restarted by the restart means.
The derivation operation receiving means
When it is determined that the rotation is abnormal while the activation condition is satisfied, the operation of the derivation operation means is performed during the period from the time when the rotation abnormality is determined to the time when the activation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed. Not accepted,
When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the activation condition is satisfied, if the activation condition is satisfied without being judged as a rotation abnormality, it is valid after the power supply is restarted. If the operation of the derivation operation means is not accepted during the period until the conversion condition is satisfied, and if the activation condition is not satisfied and a rotation abnormality is determined and restart control is performed, the power supply is restarted. A slot machine that does not accept the operation of the derivation operation means until the activation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed.

Images